Home

Vegas Pro User Manual

1. Assigning tracks to an Assignable FX If you want to use DirectX plug ins to process track signals you can add an A ssignable FX control to the M ixer window Assignable FX are made up of one or more plug ins that are used to add sound effects to the track s signal A fter the signal is processed by the plug ins the signal is sent to the assigned bus output Before you can assign a track to and A ssignable FX control the control needs to be added to the M ixer window For more information see Adding Assignable FX controls on page 186 To assign a track to an Assignable FX do the following 1 If you do not see the multipurpose slider expand the track to display it 2 Click on the multipurpose label to display a drop down list Vo O02 F Pan Center _ 7 Pan Center Multipurpose label Fe 2 lnf Aus Inf Aus B Inf Aus C Inf Select the Assignable FX from the drop down list 3 From the drop down list choose the A ssignable FX control to which you want the track to use Adjusting the Assignable FX control s volume W hen atrack is assigned to an A ssignable FX you may adjust its volume with the multipurpose fader The A ssignable FX volume is preset to inf dB mute for playback Xt 0 08 Double click the slider to set its volume at 0 0 dB WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 141 Setting up to record into tracks Vegas Pro allows
2. Default Text color Custom Text color Default Background color Custom Background color Hue 200 Red 255 Sak 240 Green p Detine Custam Wolo gt Colors olid Lum 120 Blye 255 Cancel Note To return the Time Display s text or background color to its default settings select either Default Text color or Default Background color from the shortcut menu E CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO Add to Custom Colors CHP 10 263 Setting the Time Display to monitor MIDI time code TheTime Display window can be setup to monitor the status of incoming or out going M IDI time code Vegas Pro can monitor MIDI time code being generated from and external device and monitor MIDI time code and MIDI clock information that is being generated From within Vegas Pro the Time Display settings work in conjunction with your projects properties and MIDI set up options For more information see Using the Sync preferences tab on page 275 To change the Time Display to monitor MIDI input or output do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the Time Display window 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu Time at Cursor Time Bonet T Monitors incoming MIDI time code MIDI Time Code In v MIDI Time Code Out Monitors Vegas Pro generated MIDI time code MIDI Clack Out Default Text color Custom Text color L Monitors Vegas Pro generated MIDI Clock Default Background colo
3. Menu Br ss e Toolbar perron D a Ah Eh a Marker Bar e Time Display 00 00 00 ef aen is a ARTE AA ME T ot Ruler 7 Track List I e _ e Track View Scrub Control _ e ot tti itC tC Rate 0 00 a a 2 2 gt gt Us NWN eT __ Transport Bar asain Explorer shown Jets 2 te a iT naea Mixer shown ote ote i Area er Snown Trimmer Video preview Mixer RCRA FE EL Record Time 00 00 RAM 01SMB 128MB Disk 000 Mix 000 A sgsr A CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 2 0 Toolbar T he Toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features in V egas Pro Osu e aR g Ru ws Em RE Create new project Redo command Open existing project Enable snapping to grid lines Save project Automatic crossfades Open project properties at Ripple edits Cut selected events or time range Edit tool Copy selected events or time range fe Envelope tool Paste items from clipboard into project Selection tool Undo command Zoom tool Marker bar T he M arker bar is the area where informational tags may be placed named and positioned along the project s timeline Inert Assignable Fs Remove Assignable Fx Audio Envelopes Marker Region Command INTRODUCTION CHP 1 21 Ruler The Ruler is the timeline for your project You may specify how the Ruler measures time
4. 00 0 0 0 0 Note Double click the fader to reset it to 0 0 dB If you have set each channel differently double click either the left or right fader to have the other fader match its volume setting Changing Assignable FX s meter resolution You may select a preferred meter resolution at which the A ssignable FX displays the signal levels that are being processed W hen you change the meter resolution on this control the other meters busses and preview fader automatically match the selected setting To change the meter resolution do the following 1 Right click on the meter to display a shortcut menu 7 r os ure ti B Reset Clip l 12 to 0 dE 42 to dE B0 to dE F0 to O dE 30 to dE 00 0 0 w Show Labels Hold Peaks w Hold Valleys 2 From the shortcut menu choose the meter resolution that you prefer 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to change the resolution again CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 1 9 4 Adjusting the Assignable FX for clipping W hen signals are playing back through the A ssignable FX its volume level may cause clipping The clip is displayed on both the incoming and outgoing meters depending on it s fader level If signal clips the meter will display in red at the top with a clipping value A djust the fader controls and click the red area with the clipping value to reset the meter Continue to adjust the faders and reset the meter until clipping i
5. button to quit play back before the media file finishes playing 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to preview other media files CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 2551 Using Auto Preview The Auto Preview button allows you to set Vegas Pro to automatically preview media files when you select them in the Contents List pane W hen the selected media file begins playback you may monitor its volume level on the preview bus that is located in the M ixer window The Auto Preview gt button is a toggle feature so it is either on or off all the time Simply click the Ss button to turn it on or off Changing the Explorer window views The Explorer window allows you to change the way the files and folders are displayed You may toggle through the display options by clicking the View E button or selecting a display option from the buttons sub menu Following are descriptions of each display option Tree View Displays all the available drives and folders that you may select to located media files mE E My Computer Sm My Documents H E Network Meighborhe EI w My Favorites fia Sounds H S Tutorial 9 Finished Pro a My Briefcase ad Region View This information appears below the Contents List pane It displays the embedded regions If any that are contained in the selected media wav file You may place a wav file s region directly on a track in your project T his option can save editing time because you do n
6. 1 Hold down the key 2 Select the events by clicking on them To deselect an event simply click it again thisis called toggling the event selection on or off Using the Shift key to select events T he Shift key on your keyboard allows you to select project events sequentially 1 Hold down the Shift key 2 Click the first event that you want to select 3 Click the last event that you want to select A II events between the first and last selected events are highlighted GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 67 Using the Selection Edit tool The Selection Edit tool fs allows you to select events as a block On the Toolbar click the i button Point the cursor in a corner of the area that you want to select Press and hold the left mouse button Drag the cursor to the opposite corner of the area you want to select ao BW N Release the mouse button T he events are highlighted ES Note While using the button you may toggle through 3 selection modes by right clicking _ _ FT Selecting a time range Vegas Pro has atime selection bar that islocated above the ruler This bar displays with a shaded box the time range that you have selected You may use the time selection bar for playing back a smaller portion of your project or to apply cross track edits L Time selection bar TN Unless an event is locked a selected time range affects all events or portions of events
7. Amat ck is supposed to record edit and that s wha t Vegas doe for you and doe S it Dak tter than any other sys sla em Related Topics Information pane The Contents tab provides a categorized listing of available help topics Click on the book then on the topic page m you want information about T he Index tab provides a complete listing of the help topics available U se the scroll bar to scroll through the list of available topics or type a word in the text field to quickly locate topics related to the word Select the topic and click the button T he Search tab allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topicsin the online help that contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the text field and click on the button Select the topic from the list and click the button What s This help W hat s T his help allows you to view pop up window descriptions for Vegas Pro menus buttons and dialog boxes Choose What s This from the Help menu or press the keys and then click on any Vegas Pro item To use W hat s T his help in a dialog box click on the question mark in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box then on an item CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Tip of the Day The Tip of the Day displays functional tips to increase your productivity with Vegas Pro To view and scroll through the Tip of the Day messages choose Tip of the Day from the Help menu PDF manual T here is a mo
8. Active take name File name E sTutorial Music bed way Referenced media s file path Attributes 44 100 Hz 16 bit Sterea t Media attributes Pitch shift seTleneS p 6 Pitch shift settings Cents jo Switches T Mute T Lock Loop I Normalize Event switches Honnalge gat Widg Recalculate Cancel T he event properties settings that you may change are the A ctive take s name its pitch shift value its switch use and its normalization CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 10 4 Changing the active take s name Because Vegas Pro is a non destructive audio editor the new name that you give to an event does not affect the referenced media files name In fact you are simple giving the event a new take name Typically you would change an event s name after recording multiple takes into a track or event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 208 To change an event s name do the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties T he Event Properties dialog will appear 3 Type the new name in the Active take name field If the name is not selected click in the field and select the name and then retype it Event Properties EA EI Active take name Cancel 4 Click the OK button to set the new take name Viewing the take name W hen you change an event s
9. Enter activation code Computer ID number 3 W hen the Customer Service R epresentative gives you the activation code type it in the field 4 Click the button to activate Vegas Pro and become a fully registered customer INTRODUCTION CHP 1 n 7 Using the online help Vegas Pro includes HTM L online help To view the online help you need to have Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher loaded on your system included on the Vegas Pro CD ROM Accessing help The online help is available in two forms in a M ain help window or W hat sT his help window Both forms are available via the keyboard or the Help menu Main help window The Main help window is accessed either by choosing Contents and Index from the Help menu or pressing the F1 key T his window has three tabs that you can use to find the information that you need EZ Yegas Online Help _ oy x Toolbar Back Print Options Contents SP Contents J index Search tab TEA Introducing Sonic Foundry Vegas B Introduction 2 Registerin s gouda t purchased a new way of thinking Forge si verything that you knew about the complex and cumbersome multitracks of the past and Contents Index Search Index tab Type in the keyword to find Contents Index Search S e a r C h ta b Type in the keyword to find rs ject List Topics Save and Rename an Existing P Select Topic to display offer you easy a most freque jhe
10. T his control allows you to have the video frame rate changed during the rendering process You can select from a variety output methods to reduce the frame rate By selecting one you help to reduce the total data rate of the file which can make playback easier on slower computers Change frame rate to Medium streaming 7 500 fps NTSC 29 970 fps PAL SECAM 25 000 fps Red Book digital audio 75 000 fps Slide show 0 250 fps Slow streaming 4 000 fps Video for Windows default 15 000 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 ee oP YY gt Re size frames to Video tab This control allows you to have the video frames resized during the rendering process T he included choices on the drop down list enable you to reduce the total data rate of the file which can make playback easier on slower computers Re size frames to MPEG 4 Fractal small 176x144 NTSC 172 width 3202480 NTSC 172 width with TY cropping 3044456 NTSC 1 4 with TY cropping 3040228 NTSC full 1 720x480 NTSC full 2 720x486 NTSC offline video tape 3204240 NTSC online video tape 640x460 NTSC with TY cropping 608 456 PAL 172 width 3844576 PAL 172 width with TY cropping 360x540 PAL 174 with TY cropping 3604270 PAL offline video tape 3844269 PAL online video tape 7665 76 PAL with TY cropping 720x540 Presentation 240217 80 Presentation full 3204240 Presentation small 160120 Compression Video tab The
11. Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Template Project Default Protect Default 320 kbps Stereo 160 kbps Mona 160 kbps Stereo 128 kbps Mona 128 kbps Stereo E4 kbps Mona 64 kbps Stereo 16 kbps Mono 8 kbps Mono Description T his text box displays any information that was entered when the template was created Saving an mp3 rendering template You may create your own mp3 templates by doing the following 1 IN Template field enter a name MPEG 1 Layer 3 Templates Fx Template My MPS template Pa 2 Click the Settings button The Sonic Foundry M P3 plug in dialog will appear ME Note If you have not registered the Sonic Foundry MP3 plug in Vegas Pro will launch a Registration wizard You may follow the Thank you for using Sonic Foundry MP3 Plug In al ae have purchased this product you will hay erial Thank you for using Sonic Foundry MP3 Plug In If you were emailed the number the e way to enter You have 20 encodes left on your license Ja the number is to copy and paste it into iibe i eld below iyeu OES DA AY a ches eti dialog s instructions to purchase the plug in T SEES TEE a i Altemati pl oes copy over the phon et with ervice Bele ae from Sonic Foundry or click the would like to continue using the trial version radio button The trial
12. The plug ins are cumulative during playback For example when the track s signal passes through the EQ it carries the EQ s settings as it passes through the Compression plug in then the signal carries both those plug in settings to the next plug in etc Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange plug ins in a certain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next plug in on the chain T here isno right or wrong way to order plug ins Although some plug ins work better when they follow another H owever the plug in s order in the chain is strictly based on your preferences and desired output You may arrange plug ins on either the Track FX dialog or the Plug in C hooser dialog Arranging plug ins from the Track FX dialog To arrange the plug ins order from the Track FX dialog do the following 1 Click on the Track FX button The Track FX dialog appears 2 On the plug in that you want to move right click to display a shortcut menu and choose Move Left or Move Right A Iso you may simply click and drag the plug in to its new position 1 oe ee Voiceover Do oean a a a a l gt aa 1 zal Yo 00d fly Track EQ _ Th ree Pan Center 1 Untied Nove Letty x l Move Aight po gt Remove Track EG 1 2 Track Compressor Track Note Gate 3 Once the chain s plug ins are in the order that you want click anywhere outside the Tr
13. unmute the track x Muted track Val Vol Before muting the track After muting the track Soloing a track This track button isolates a track s events for playback and mutes the other tracks events so you can focus on a track W hen you solo a track the other tracks will be grayed out on the Track View You may solo more than one track at a time To solo the track simply click the solo 7 button Click it again to restore all tracks for playback Before applying Solo to the track After applying Solo to the track CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 138 Assigning a track to a bus A busis where various track signals are mixed together and output If your project contains multiple stereo busses you may assign a track to a specific bus output To assign a track to a bus do the following 1 Click the Bus amp button to display a drop down list of available busses 2 From the drop down list choose the bus to which you want to output the track Select a bus for playback zA OPL3 54 Playback BusB OPL3 54 Playback Bus C OPLS 54 Playback Note If you only have one stereo bus in your project this button will not appear in the tracks controls For more information see Using the Audio properties tab on page 265 ee Assigning a track to an auxiliary bus A n auxiliary bus allows you to send track signals to a secondary bus independent of the primary bus A uxiliary
14. 16 tpt w Time at Cursor Time Format MIDI Time Code In MIDI Time Code Out MIDI Clock Out Default Text color Custom Text color Default Background color Custom Background color 3 From the shortcut menu choose Time Format to display a sub menu 4 From the sub menu choose the desired time format Both the Time window and ruler will display the chosen time format CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 262 p ___ Changing the Time Displays colors You may change the background and text color used by the Time Display To change the color usage do the following 1 Right click on the Time Display to display the shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose either Custom Text color Of Custom Background color The Color dialog will appear 3 On the Color dialog choose the color setting that you want 4 Click the OK button to set the text or background color and close the C olor dialog Or click the Cancel button to keep the existing color settings and close the Color dialog w Time at Cursor Time Borat MIDI Time Code In MIDI Time Code Out MIDI Clock Out Default Text color Custom Text color Default Background color Custom Background color Color Basic colors EE 8808 Be SHEED EE unD w Time at Cursor Time Bornnat MIDI Time Code In MIDI Time Code Out MIDI Clock Out
15. 180 Bypassing Assignable FX plug ins 190 bus plug ins 184 track plug ins 146 C Color tracks 135 Command markers 86 defined 87 deleting 90 editing 88 moving 88 naming 89 navigating 89 placing 87 Scott Studios defined 86 Compression plug in 152 amount control 154 attack control 154 auto gain comp control 155 controlling clipping 152 input gain control 153 output gain control 153 presets 153 reduction meter 154 release control 155 smooth saturation control 155 threshold control 154 Computer ID number 15 Converting format See Rendering a project Copying events 69 time and events 70 time selection 69 INDEX Crossfades 115 117 automatic 115 curve types 116 curve types changing 116 manually setting 116 volume changing 117 Ctrl key selecting 66 Cursor using 65 Customizing Vegas Pro 243 280 docking windows 243 Explorer window 245 252 preferences 268 280 project grid spacing 254 project properties 263 267 project ruler 253 time display window 261 263 toolbar 255 260 Cutting events 73 74 ripple mode 98 time and event selection 73 Cutting time and events ripple mode 99 Cutting time selection ripple mode 99 Deleting atrack 133 Deleting Assignable FX 191 Deleting events 75 76 ripple mode 100 time and event selection 76 time selection 76 Deleting plug ins 185 Deleting time and events ripple mode 100 Deleting time s
16. 2 After the group is selected you may clear it one of three ways From the Edit menu choose Group to display a sub menu and then choose Clear F Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Undo Move Events Ctrl 2 Take Take a GrealeNew G peN From Group F Properties OO OOOO O Create New G Select All Ctrl 4 Undo All Clear Edit History On one of the selected events right click to display a shortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Group and then Clear e Press the U shortcut key to clear the group 3 From the Edit menu choose Group and then Clear from the sub menu T he events will be released from the group and may be moved or edited independently CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 1 20 Using the Trimmer window Events may be placed in the Trimmer window directly from your project in which case they are referred to as media files The Trimmer allows you to work with one media file at a time M any of the shortcut keys and right click shortcut menus are available in the Trimmer You also may place a media file directly into the Trimmer from the Vegas Pro Explorer window The Trimmer window may be placed in the Docking area of Vegas Pro or float over the work area For more information see Window Docking Area on page 23 From the View menu choose Trimmer or press the shortcut keys to display the Trimmer window if it isnot displaying already History
17. Below is a list of placement options e Place events on separate tracks e Place events as takes on a track lt lt You will see one event on the track The other events are listed at takes beneath the the topmost event CHP 2 QUICK START Coo Double clicking an event T his method creates a new track and places the event at the cursor s position along the timeline H owever once the events are placed you can move them from one track to another or change their position on the timeline Placing a event on the Video Ruler A video media file may be placed in your project by either dragging and dropping or double clicking T he video is placed on the Video Ruler located above the audio tracks If the video file includes audio the audio is placed below the Video Ruler on a newly created audio track Dragging dropping or double clicking a video event Video event placement is the same as placing an audio event dragging and dropping controls timeline placement and double clicking places the event at the cursor s position T he Video Ruler supports one video event at a time So whether or not an event exists on the Video Ruler only affects what happens in your project when you place a video event T he following table describes placement scenarios Event to place Videoruler status Placement method Result Video only No event Drag drop or double click Video placed on ruler Video with audio No event Drag drop or
18. Linear in Fast out K Switches Take Group a Linear in Slow out y aa Fast in Slow out Open in Sound Forge Ctrl E gt lt zj Linear in Linear out Cut Ctra E Slow in Fast out Copy Se E a Fast in Fast out Paste Eti S Delete Delete o Slow in Slow out Fast in Linear out A Properties K Slow in Linear out ised 3 Click the desired fade type to set it Changing the crossfade volume You may set a cross faded event s volume and Vegas Pro will adjust the crossfade x to graphically reflect the volume change W hen you change the volume in the cross faded region the event being faded in is affected For the event being faded out simply adjust its volume For more information see Setting an event s volume on page 113 W hen you place the mouse pointer at the top of the cross fade region the pointer changes to a hand cursor 4 with which you may use to lower the faded in event s overall volume To set the cross fade volume do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the cross fade region 2 When you see the envelope cursor dt click and drag the volume line to the desired level As you drag the volume line down Vegas Pro displays the event s decibel level N Volume line for faded in Decibel level event Crossfade before Crossfade after volume change volume change 3 Release the mouse to set the
19. MTC Input MTC Output MIDI Clock Output T Trigger playback only do not chase Free wheel slack time seconds 0 200 Free wheel playback time seconds li O00 Synchronization delay time seconda i O00 Cancel Apply T he following list describes how to work with the MTC Input tab e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the A dvanced Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the A dvanced Preferences dialog and return to the Sync tab e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and return to the Sync tab CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 W hen this option is selected Vegas Pro will not chase its playback speed to the incoming MTC data Instead Vegas Pro will trigger at the appropriate time T here are two situations when you will want to use this option e f your computer does not have the speed required to accurately chase time code T his method is best used for shorter periods of time We recommend not using this feature for long periods of time because Vegas Pro may fall out of sync e If your sound card hasan external W ord Clock input this clock source will keep your digital signals locked together and eliminate the need for Vegas Pro to chase Flee wheel slack time Rene o 200 z Free wheel playback time seconds h O00 Synchronization delay time seconds fi O00 R W hen Free wheel for time code los
20. Untitieg Moe Een a Mowe Right To enable the plug in again click its Te check box or choose Bypass from the shortcut menu OBIE Els Track Compressor Track Note Gate You may bypass plug ins either from the Track FX dialog or the Plug in C hooser dialog WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 17 Removing plug ins from a chain You may remove plug ins from a chain at any time Chain plug ins may be removed from either the Track FX dialog or the Plug in Chooser dialog Removing chain plug ins from the Track FX dialog To remove a plug in from the chain in the Track FX dialog do the following 1 Click on the Track FX button The Track FX dialog appears 2 On the Track FX dialog select the plug in that you want to remove 3 Right click to display the shortcut menu and choose Remove Compressor Hr Track Noise Gate ba altel n a Bypass Jiu ntitled Move Left Ss ove Bight pee eee ee es Track EQ Track Compressor 5 i Track Noise Gate 5 2 1 40 0 160 320 B40 12k 26k BA 4 Repeat step 2 3 to remove other plug ins from the chain Removing chain plug ins from the Plug in Chooser dialog To remove a plug in from the chain in the Plug in Chooser dialog do the following 1 Click on the Track FX button The Track FX dialog appears ofl Track EQ Track Compressor H 4 A ok a Untitled iy 3 Edit Plugin Chain 2 On the Track FX dialog cli
21. button The A dvanceA udio Preferences dialog will appear and display all the audio devices that are installed on your computer Advanced Audio Preferences EES General Audio devices Flaybac Record Microsoft Sound M ae Record PLASA a Select a device in the list Settings for selected audio device M interpolate position required for inaccurate devices Position bias B4 to E4 e 0 Set the controls that Vegas Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Pro will use for each device If you select one of these devices from the list you may set the controls that Vegas Pro will use with the device Each device may be set up independently of the other devices Following are descriptions of each control Interpolate position During project playback you may notice the cursor position is different than what you are hearing T his problem stems from inaccuracies in some audio devices I Interpolate position required for inaccurate devices Click this control s check box and Vegas Pro will attempt to compensate for the inaccuracies by interpolating the cursor s correct position during playback or recording CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 sso 275 Position bias The position bias control gives you additional cursor control when it is inaccurately displayed during project playback and recording Position bias B4 to E4 aH o If you have enabled the Interpolate position contr
22. changed T his feature is useful if you want to organize similar tracks together For example you may want all your background vocals to have a different color from your lead vocals To change a track s color do the following 1 In the Track List right click on a track to display a shortcut menu aa Rename Duplicate Track Insert Audio Track Ctri G Delete Delete Insert Remove Envelope Track Color 2 From the shortcut menu choose Track Color to display a sub menu 3 From the sub menu select a color for the track s number and events Changing track height T here are two ways to control track height in your project toggling the tracks height and expanding an individual track Toggling the tracks You may change an individual track s height in the Track View by clicking the view ai ml buttons on thetrack A Iternatively you may use the ctri shif 4 or y shortcut keys to toggle through different track height scenarios T he shortcut keys affect all tracks in your project and make them the same height Click Track height Press command keys cer ShiR A or SR HA or ctrl Shiff 4 or CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1336y Expanding an individual track You may resize a track by pulling the lower or right portion of it Place the mouse pointer at the bottom or right side of the track T he pointer turns into an up down or left right arrow Click and drag
23. deleting 211 deleting active 211 deleting from list 212 renaming 210 Event recording into 206 Events copying 69 crossfading 115 117 cutting 73 defined 29 deleting 75 editing 54 56 envelopes ASR 113 grouping 57 118 119 locking 54 movingin time 34 moving multiple 35 moving single 35 name changing 104 name viewing 104 pasting 70 72 placing 33 34 52 properties setting 103 112 removing from video 42 INDEX iv gt ripple edits 98 102 selecting options 66 selecting with time 68 snapping 93 splitting 96 splitting with time selection 55 trimming cropping 74 Expandingatrack 136 Explorer window 23 all filesview 252 auto preview 251 details view 252 managing media files 246 250 previewing media files 250 region view 251 summary view 252 toolbar 245 transport bar 32 250 tree view 251 using 30 50 245 view options 31 251 252 Fader Assignable FX 140 auxiliary bus 139 track 136 Fax technical support 13 G General editing 65 92 cursor 65 time vs event 66 General preferences 269 Glossary 285 298 Grid lines changing spacing 254 changing type 94 enable disable snapping 94 snapping events to 94 INDEX Grouping events 57 118 119 clearing 119 creating new 118 removing event from 119 Installation 13 system requirements 12 K Keyboard commands 25 27 cursor placement 26 65 edit 25 event 26 miscellaneous 27 p
24. e DirectX M edia 6 0 included on CD ROM or later Recommended 400 MHz processor e 128MB RAM e 16 bit color display Technical Support If you experience problems or have questions while using Vegas Pro there are a few ways to get the information that you need from Sonic Foundry W eb site support Email support Fax support and Telephone support Web site support Visit our Web site at www sonicfoundry com support You will find technical information reference information program updates tips and tricks and a Frequently A sked Questions FA Q archive Email support Send your questions or comments to support sonicfoundry com Our Technical Support Department will respond to you within 36 business hours INTRODUCTION CHP 1 n re is Fax support Send your questions or comments via fax 24 hours a day at 608 256 7300 You will receive a response within 36 business hours Telephone support Our technical support representatives are available M onday Friday from 8am to 7pm CST at 608 256 5555 Before You Call Support Before you contact our technical support department we ask that you do the following e Check to see if your question may be answered in the manual or online help e Usea telephone that isnear the computer where Vegas Pro is installed e Make sure you have registered the product For more information see Registration on page 15 Installing Vegas Pro Before you install Vegas Pro we recommen
25. or i to play back the project and check the timing of the envelope 4 Repeat steps 2 3 until the envelope points are at the desired position a Note You may also set the volume by right Saito B0dE Set to 6 0 dB clicking an envelope point and choosing a Set to DdB hp Set to O dB Set to Inf dB Set to Inf dB volume setting from the shortcut menu Or ae ae choose Select All from the shortcut menu to as a elec raise or lower all points on the envelope S a Changing the volume fade curves Between each envelope point you may set the type of volume fade curve fast linear or slow From the selected envelope point fade curves are applied to the volume lines that occur later on the timeline To set the volume fade curve do the following 1 Right click on a point to display a shortcut menu Set to 6 0 dB Linear Fade a hihu i I j if i L diil a Fast fade a Linear fade Slow Fade Slow fade i ee a MA J lw z td Er i b h Lay j Select ll 1 ee ae As the graphic shows you may have more Reset All than one type of fade curve on an envelope 2 From the shortcut menu choose the curve type Curve types are applied to volume line WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 168 Hiding the volume envelopes A fter you have set your volume envelopes on the tracks you may hide them from the Track View H iding volume envelopes will not affect playback The points that you set will still aut
26. will use pg 202 4 Select the event to record into a Note You may record into multiple events by pressing the key and make your selections NT 5 On the Marker bar click and drag to make the time selection You may adjust the time selection by dragging the selection bar s starting and ending points To record multiple takes click the Loop play button on the Transport bar For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 208 k Time selection bar 00 00 00 00 00 05 Pre roll Post roll Punch in Punch out 6 Click the Record button on the Transport bar to begin recording CHP 8 RECORDING 208 p SSS Working with multiple recorded takes If you made a time selection during recording clicking the Loop Play button on the Transport bar will enable you to continually create takes during recording Takes are different versions of a recorded event that you may play back and edit During recording Vegas Pro continually loops back to the beginning of the time selection and starts recording a new take until you stop recording A fter you are done recording takes you can preview choose a new active rename and delete them Previewing takes Vegas Pro allows you to view alist of takes and preview them before placing them in your project T he takes are listed from the selected event in which the takes were recorded To preview takes do the following 1 Select the e
27. x Toolbar w Status Bar 7 Video Ruler w Commands Ruler Show Audio Envelopes law Volume yi AUH A w Fe Minimize All Tracks Rebuild Peaks 7 Video Preview Alt 6 2 From the sub menu choose Pan All panning envelopesin your project will no longer appear in the Track View 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to display the panning envelopes again Removing track panning envelopes You may remove a panning envelope from atrack W hen you remove the envelope the events on the track will no longer have automated panning Also the panning envelope line will no longer be displayed It isimportant to remember that when you remove a panning envelope from a track and then add a it again you will need to reset the pan points To remove a panning envelope do the following 1 Select the track or tracks that you want to remove the panning envelope s 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes A sub menu will appear There will be a check mark next to Pan indicating that those envelopes are currently being used 3 From the sub menu choose Pan A I panning envelopes on the selected tracks will be removed WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 167 Mixing multiple tracks to a single track Vegas Pro allows you to mix down atime selection or an entire project to a single track stereo event H owever if your project includes any muted tracks Vegas Pro will not mix those events into the new mixed down track T he original tracks and
28. you may Set to 100 Right a i P Fast Fade delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Le Slow Fade Delete from the shortcut menu Or you may v Linear Fade ene Fast Fade start over adding envelope points by selecting ene Reset All from the shortcut menu ear S Rezet All WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 165 Setting the panning envelope points Once the envelope points have been added you may move them to different panning values along the timeline to automate the track s panning effect You may move one point at a time even during play back and listen to the resultsin real time Also you may set the type of fade curve between each envelope point To move an envelope point do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on an envelope point T he mouse pointer appears as a hand m 2 Click and drag the points to the desired position As you move a pan point an information box displays both the point s occurrence on the timeline and its decibel level al la ld nana We Ad ee TT Fiery E Wis You can only set one point i id i mae ee e for display purposes 3 Click either or i to play the project and check the timing of the panning envelope iid ain A 4 Repeat step 2 3 until the envelope points are at the desired position i Note You may also set the pan by right Set to 100 Left Set to 100 Left licki lope point and cho
29. 1 3 to reorder more Toolbar buttons Reordering buttons via the Customize Toolbar dialog The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available from the Toolbar You may return the Toolbar to its default settings by pressing the Reset button on the Customize Toolbar dialog To reorder the Toolbar s buttons from this dialog do the following 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar T he Customize Toolbar dialog will appear Options Enable Snapping z EE Curent toolbar buttons Snap lio laid Shem lo Make f Open Ctrl 0 Save Ctrl 5 eer Properties Alt E nter Separator Move Up F Move Down Order of current buttons on the Toolbar 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button you want to move and click on the Move Up and Move Down buttons 3 Repeat step 2 to reorder more buttons 4 Close the Close button to save the changes and close the C ustomize Toolbar dialog CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 258 pS Adding buttons to the Toolbar Vegas Pro includes a series of function buttons that you may add to the Toolbar T hese buttons are listed in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may also add separators on the Toolbar to organize the buttons to your preferences You may return the Toolbar to its default settings by pressing the Reset button on the Customize Toolbar dialog To add a button to the Toolbar do the following 1 From th
30. 100 Encoder Codec Windows Media Audio V2 ACELP net MPEG Layer 3 Vouware MetaS ound Voumware Metayoice Enabling this feature eee Format 8kbps 8 kHz mono Passing it to the audid 22 1 And 44100 i Formats Le hen Video sample rate will improve the audio quality of the IV Use Video compressed output lt Back Cancel Help 16 kbps 16 kHz stereo Resample 16 kbps 22 kHz mono 20 kbps 16 kHz stereo W Use Video Codec Microsoft MPEG 4 Video Codec V1 rs Microsof MP odec Vo Microsoft MPEG 4 Video Codec Wa 7 Click the Next button to choose an audio codec format and video codec from their respective drop down lists 8 Click the Finish button to save the template and return to the Edit Template dialog Edit Template 21x Template Creates an ASF stream or file that has FM radio quality a mono audio content Use this setting to encode a single bandwidth that supports client connections over modems m Windows Media Audio Y2 16 kbps 16 kHz mono 4 100 Hz You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list clicking the Edit button starting the wizard again and making your setting changes aaa Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the Delete button ae CHP 9 239 Using rm controls and templates CHP 9 Vegas Pro allows you to render your project to RealM edia rm files
31. 137 naming renaming 134 Number 36 Organizing 134 panning 40 164 166 recording into 141 204 reordering 134 scribble strip 39 solo button 38 soloing 137 view buttons 37 view options 135 volume fader 39 Transport bar 22 42 52 reference 43 Trimmer window 24 120 124 event placing 121 event placing from track 121 events placing from Explorer 122 events placing on track 122 overview 120 regions and markers adding 123 sound editor opening from 124 working with 122 Trimming events 74 time and event selection 75 time selection 75 Troubleshooting 281 284 Tutorial 49 63 aligning audio with video 53 56 editing time selection 55 editing voice over 54 equalization EQ settings 60 event editing 56 folder copying 49 grouping audio and video 57 locking events 54 placing music bed 58 INDEX O asassS5050 005050500 _ rending the project 62 saving the project veg 61 splitting an event 55 time selection editing 55 video compression settings 63 video placement 50 video playback 52 Video Preview window 51 voice over placement 52 volume envelope 58 U Undo command 77 series of edits 77 Undo Redo commands 77 79 clearing history 79 US contact information Title page V Vegas Pro creating a copy of a project 216 project properties 45 registering 15 renaming a project 46 rendering a project 47 218 241 saving a project
32. B and Cancel Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation We Sonic Foundry Multi Tap L tht From the Menu bar p L FX Chains Sonic Foundry Chorus he Sonic Foundry Noise Gate H Track Sonic Foundry Click Removal T Sonic Foundry Noise Aed Sonic Foundry Distortion K Sonic Foundry Faragraphi Delete Sonic Foundry Flange ah wah Sonic Foundry Parametric From the Mixer window Sonic Found Gapper Snipper WS onic Foundry Pitch Shift SaveAss Insert Assignable F Sonic Foundry Graphic Dynamics We Sonic Foundry Reverb Remove Assignable Fs Sonic Foundry Graphic EG WS Sonic Foundry Simple Del m 7 Show Preview Fader Chain area 2 Select the Fx folder to view alist of the available plug ins on your system If you have any presets plug in chains saved you may select the FX Chains folder and view those presets For more information see Working with preset plug in chains on page 196 3 Select the plug in s and add it to the chain area You can add plug ins in three ways e Click on the desired plug in then drag and drop it to the chain area Double click on a plug in e Select the plug in and click on the Add button 4 W hen you have finished adding plug ins click on the OK button to save the chain The Assignable FX control is added to the M ixer window T hese controls are number chronologically FX 1 FX 2 FX 3 etc Newly added Assignable FX Mixer f CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 48 UUU Adding plug
33. Event Properties dialog will appear 3 Adjust the pitch shift in the Semitone Cents or both using the arrows or simply typing in the desired value Event Properties H E Active take name Pitch shift Semitones Cents Cancel 4 Click the OK button to set the pitch shift for the event ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 107 Setting event switches You may apply event switches via the properties dialog Switches allow you to edit specific track events by muting locking looping or normalizing the waveform You may apply one or all switches to an event M ore information on using switches isin the next section To change apply a switch from the Event Properties dialog do the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties T he Event Properties dialog will appear 3 Click the check box es of the switch that you want to apply to the event Event Properties RAEI Active take name File name E Tutorialkusic bed waw Attributes 44 100 Hz 16 bit Sterea Switches l Mute l Lock Loop l Normalize Womaliee gate Olde Recalculate Cancel 4 Click the OK button to set the switch es for the event Using event switches Event switches are functions that you can apply to events You may apply switches to a single selected event or multiple selected events at the same time Switches allow you to edit specific track even
34. Eventually we will delete the original audio but for now let s use it as a reference point Placing the new voice over T he new voice over will replace the poor quality audio that is muted on the first track 1 In the media list select the file titled Voiceover 2 Drag the file so that its starting point is approximately when our narrator appears on the timeline Drop the file and Vegas Pro creates a new track for it 3 Press either the or i button to play the voice over 4 Press the button to stop playback During playback you will hear the narrator s pause to review notes and cough Below isthe anatomy of the voice over E A Welcome to Sonic Foundry B Um C This tutorial will D Cough E Found in the new T hese errors B and D will be removed later Also during playback you probably saw that the new voice over and the video are out of sync N ext we will align the voice over with the video TUTORIAL CHP 3 53 Aligning new voice over with video We will now position the voice over so that it will be synchronized with the video W e will use the poor quality audio as a reference point Since we can see the audio waveform sychronizing is made easier You can also refer to the video s frames on the ruler to see when the narrator begins to appear in the video To make it easier to see the audio events we can zoom in on the project T here are a several ways to manage the project
35. FX dialog click the Edit Plug in Chain button a T he Plug in C hooser dialog will appear with the preset in the chain area 3 Add delete or rearrange plug ins associated to the preset chain 4 Click the OK button or press the key to save the preset aaaea Note Click the Save As button to save the edited chain as a preset E N Organizing your plug ins W ithin the Plug in Chooser dialog you may create folders and move selected plug ins into them For example if you have different company s DirectX plug ins installed on your computer you can move their respective plug ins to newly created folders Navigate New View ARS Sonic Foundry Acoustic Mirror Wr Sonic Foundry Mult B and Audio dy FX Y Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation We Sonic Foundry Mult T ap C Ba E FX Chains Y Sonic Foundry Chorus We Sonic Foundry Noise Gate H L Track Y Sonic Foundry Click Removal WS onic Foundry Moise Red __ Ads v Sonic Foundry Distortion i Sonic Foundry Paragraphi Delete it Sonic Foundry Flangeah wahi i Sonic Foundry Parametric aaa Y Sonic Foundry Gapper Snipper FS onic Foundry Pitch Shift SaveAss Sonic Foundry Graphic Dynamics WS onic Foundry Reverb Y Sonic Foundry Graphic EG WS onic Foundry Simple Del amp Distortion Reverb LH Flange Wah wah T he Plug in Chooser dialog works similarly to the W indows Explorer that is included with your operating system H owever you may only work
36. General g Audio Synce w Snap To Markers Shift F8 Bus to hardware assignments Use Microsoft Sound Mapper for all busses Use a custom bus routing a We Gi Gs o 2 o o o p o z o o o o o o z Gi e a Gl 4G a E Default recording device OPL3SARecodng F me eo 2 On the Preferences dialog click the Routing tab 3 Click the Use a Custom Routing radio button Use a custom bus routing gt Note If you have selected Always Use Sound Mapper you will not be able to assign the busses to different hardware You can only assign busses to different hardware if you select Use a Custom Routing ee USING THE MIXER CHP 7 177 4 In the table click the radio button in the output device s row and in the bus s column to assign a bus to a specific output device Routing Bus to hardware assignments Use Microsoft Sound Mapper for all busses Use a custom bus routing Note Multiple busses may be mapped to a single sound card Also the grayed out busses may be assigned at this time so that they are ready when you add them later or use them in future projects pm 5 Repeat step 2 to assign more busses to output devices 6 From the Default recording device drop down list select a device used when recording T his option sets the device that you use for recording into tracks H owever tracks may be set to use specific devices other than the default setting For mor
37. L Start recording RECORDING 200 Recording into an event You may record directly into an event By recording into an event you specify where along the timeline to record and for how long T he edges of the selected event serve as the punch in and out points that Vegas Pro uses for recording Recording into an event allows you to establish pre roll before recording which gives you time to prepare before recording starts T he existing event that you record into is not affected or deleted It will be listed as a take under the recorded event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 208 A fter you record into an event the recorded waveform appears on the track T he recorded event like all eventsin your project will have a source media file By default Vegas Pro stores recorded media files in the Vegas Pro program folder H owever you may specify where recorded media files are stored For more information see Specifying where recordings are stored on page 213 To record into a selected event do the following 1 Place the cursor before the event to allow for pre roll 2 Press the key and click the event to select it Selected Non selected event even TI een Note You may record into multiple events by pressing the key and make your selections 3 Click the Arm for Record button on the event s track If you are recording into multiple selected events arm th
38. New Track Ctrl hM Mis To Preview Chrl Shift h ingle Stereo 44 100 Hz 16 bit PCM wave file Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E Format PCM X Attributes faa 00 Hz 16 bit Stereo z Sample rate 44 100 E Bit depth 16 is Custom oe Channels Stereo File name New Track way Save as type Wave Microsol ft Sway Template j Project Default Custom Description Single Stereo 44 100 Hz 16 bit PCM wave file 2 Click the Custom button to display the C ustom setting dialog T he settings that you may change are as follows Template Enter the name of your template Sample rate Choose a rate from the drop down list Description Enter the template s parameters Bit depth Choose a bit depth from the drop down list Format Choose an audio format from the drop Channels_ Choose a channel option from the drop down list down list 3 Click the i button to save the template Or click the x button to delete a selected template WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 169 Using the Mixer ee ee The Vegas Pro Mixer window is where you control the project s mix This window is where all the Bus and Assignable FX controls appear when you add them to your project From this window you may adjust the outgoing signal s volume using the Bus faders More details on the Bus and Assignable FX controls are discussed later in this chapter Using the Mixer window The Mixer is a dockable window
39. Noise Reduction Bypass Move Lett Move Aight Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG 2 Right click on the plug in that you want to remove to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Remove T he plug in will be removed from the chain Deleting plug ins from the Plug in Chooser dialog 1 Click the Bus FX button 2 The Bus FX dialog appears 2 On the BusFX dialog click the Edit Plug in Chain button 2 The Plug in Chooser dialog will appear with the chain Delete co Reverb Noise Reduction H Graphic EQ 3 3 Select the plug in that you want to delete and click the Delete button to remove it from the chain 4 Click the OK button or press the key to save the chain and close the Plug in Chooser dialog CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 186 Using Assignable FX controls W ith Vegas Pro you can take advantage of plug ins when processing your project s signal T hese plug ins may be added to your project as A ssignable FX controls A ssignable FX controls can have a series of plug ins chains assigned to it The Assignable FX controls appear in the M ixer window along with busses to which you may route the A ssignable FX Solo Bus assignment Hi 3 i A ane w Assignable FX Meter Output 00 oo O10 Master 5 Scribble Strip Fader Mute Prevents the Assignable FX from processing the track s signal pg 194 Input Master Fader Adjusts the signal s incoming volume to the Ass
40. OA da Bla Boe ede ees 107 Using event switches 0 00 eee eee 107 M tngamevenl cost ti ei tig bo oo eee eee ete ahad cag eedeaseinas 108 LOCKING an CV EIIGs sak haters tin aaa nal be et a eae are a ee ea 109 LOODING AIVCVECING gf dinyx8s 4 nah oe be ee eee ek Boe ee Reece tecateaeees 110 Normalizing an CVE fe 2 on ie ie eee died tnd beet eee ee ieee ieee 111 Using event envelopes ASR 0 0 0 ccc eee ee ee eee 113 Setting an event S VOIUME 2 ce ee eee eee ees 113 Setting an event s fade in and Out 1 cc ees 113 Crosstading evento ianaeeweoi een Shee eee eee EERE aa 115 Automatic crossfades an door be a ea ean waeenl eee 115 Manually setting a crossfade 2 cc eee eee eee 116 Changing crossfade CUIVCS 6 ii4iutwesidekieeddesdueat idea wedeneeeen bene 116 i Grouping events eai lt 25 ice vee as eee ou ie eee ee eaten se eee ee 118 Creating ai new Group ii 4 646A ie ea eee ac eae a ee eee beet TE 118 Removing an event from a QrOup 2 ee ee eee eens 119 CleanhiG a Giroupscs bitte tetanus cower ae een aee es Queda duad res 119 Using the Trimmer WiIndOW 000 cece eee eee eee 120 Showing an event inthe Trimmer 0200 00s 121 Working in the Trimmer WINdOW 2 ssassn saarena nennen 122 Opening the sound editor from the Trimmer 000000e eee eee eee 124 Using the Edit details window 00 0c cece eee 124 Viewing the Edit Detai
41. Pro will use when Gen e ea sor cargo generating MIDI Clock Output device ESFM Spnthesis O 400 information This device may Chase to ml Time Code settings be set to the same one that you put denic JESS mPu 401 COO E selected for Generate MTC Frame rate SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps Chase to MIDI Select the input software or Ad d Default All Time Code device and frame rate that Advanced _Detawan settings Vegas Pro will use when chasing MTC Cancel Apply CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 27 6 T he following list describes how to work with the Sync tab Click the Advanced button to set other Sync preferences Click the Default All button to return the Sync tab to its default settings Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Preferences dialog open Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Preferences dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Preferences dialog Setting advanced Sync preferences From the Sync preferences tab you may access advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button The Advanced Sync Preferences dialog will appear and display three tabs for M TC input MTC output and MIDI Clock Output T he following sections display the selected tab followed by definitions of its controls MTC input T histab containscontrolsfor MTC input It isdisplayed only if a device is selected for MTC input on the Sync tab
42. Show Labels Hold Peaks w Hold Valleys Muting a bus This bus button enables you to temporarily disable playback of the bus W hen a busis muted it appears grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of the meter You may mute more than one bus at a time To mute the bus simply click the M ute 8 button Click it again to unmute the bus X Before muting the bus After muting the bus Muted bus i CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 180 Soloing a bus T his bus button Isolates a bus s playback and mutes the other busses so you can focus on a specific output W hen you solo a bus the other busses will be grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of their respective meters You may solo more than one busat a time To solo the bus simply click the Solo 7 button Click it again to restore all busses for playback y Before applying Solo to the bus After applying Solo to the bus T BusB bus O Naming or renaming a bus Every bus that appears in the M ixer window has a Scribble Strip where you can type a name You may name or rename the bus at any time by doing the following 1 Double click in the Scribble Strip and type the a bus name Double click and type the name Jf the bus already has been named you will see the previously Scribble Strip entered name 2 Press the key to save the bus s name USING THE MIXER CHP 7 1831 Adding plug in chains to busses You
43. T his chapter was designed to help you get familiar with the interface and describe the essential operations for using Vegas Pro U sing this chapter will get you into the program quickly to begin your first project or to begin experimenting with Vegas Pro In the next chapter we take you through a sample project from start to finish using sample media files included on the Vegas Pro CD ROM For more information see Tutorial on page 49 Media Files Before we get started in Vegas Pro there are a few terms that need to be defined e Media files audio and video files that may be placed within your project Events playable portions of media files within a track Events have fully editable starting and ending points Tracks timeline containers where events are placed and arranged What type of media can you use A media file is an audio file that can be placed on a track or a video file that can be placed on the video ruler Format Name Extension Definition Wave Microsoft wav Standard audio format used on Windows based computers Video for Windows avi Standard audio video format used on Windows based computers AIFF alf Standard audio format used on Macintosh computers QuickTime MOV Standard audio video format used on Macintosh computers using Microsoft DirectShow Bitmap bmp Standard graphic format used on Windows based computers MPEG3 mp3 Highly compressed media file This file type can only be placed via plug
44. Video tab has a Compression button that you may click to apply video compression codecs W hen you click this button the Video Compression dialog appears ideo Compression x Compressor Compressor Full Frames LI ncompressed al Cancel Full Frames Uncompressed FF a ne Sea Cinepak Codec by Radius ornpnessian ireliti maaan Intel Indeo F Video A3 H gt l Microsoft Video 1 nE Indeo video 5 04 kep Frame Even i Mames i F Data Rate 125 KB sec Compression codecs W hen you select on of the codecs the dialog s controls are enabled For details about each codecs controls and configuration contact the manufacturer Interleave audio control Video tab W hen enabled this control allows you to specify how often the audio and video stream data is interleaved Interleaving relates directly to how the data is saved in the file For example during the rendering process the audio data is written in between the video data based on the frame setting that you specified I Inteleave every i Frames Interleaving allows for optimal playback of the avi file CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 236 Saving an avi rendering template You may create your own avi templates by doing the following 1 IN Template field enter a name Audio Video Template My AM Template le x 2 From the drop down lists on the A udio tab choose the settings that you want the template to use 3 On the Video tab
45. W hen you disable snapping to markers the the marker lines will not appear across the tracks T he events however will not snap to them Disable snapping Vegas Pro allows you to snap events to project markers that you have placed and the grid lines that appear in the Track View You may disable snapping to either markers grid lines or disable snapping altogether To disable enable all snapping you may click the Snap 3 button on the Toolbar Or you may toggle the snap commands located on the Options menu W hen a command is enabled you will see a check mark next to it To disable a snap command simply select its check marked command to disable it Options Select to disable enable all snapping w Enable Snapping Fa w Snap To Grid Ctrl F 8 All enabled Select to disable enable only v Snap To Mark Shift F8 n Sees wi l snapping to grid lines Customize Toolbar Preferences Select to disable enable only snapping to placed markers Note If you disable all snapping an event will still snap to the cursor or region in out points CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 96 Splitting events Vegas Pro allows you to create multiple independently functioning events from a single event by splitting them Splitting creates a new ending point for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event l marem One event Pii Original event Split position mw Split position pie
46. and displaying the Toolbar 00 cece eee eee 256 Reordering the Toolbar buttons 0 00 annann 257 Adding buttons to the Toolbar s lt 4 46s008ewke det eee ee ed ceeded dee eek 258 0J Removing buttons from the Toolbar aunan aa nnn ees 259 Using the Time Display WINdOW 002200 cece eee eee 261 Changing the Time Display window s settingS 000 eee cece eee ees 261 Changing the Time Displays colors 0 0000s 262 Setting the Time Display to monitor MIDI time code 00020 0s 263 Working with project properties 20 202 eee eee 263 Using the Summary properties tab 0 0 ee ee eens 264 Using the Audio properties tab 2 0c cee eee eee ee eeaae 265 Using the Video properties tab 000 ee tees 266 Using the Ruler properties tab ccc ee teens 267 Using Vegas Pro preferenceS 000 cee eee eee 268 Viewing the Preferences dialog 000 cece ee eee teen eeeaes 268 Using the General preferences tab n ununun nananana ee eee 269 Using the Routing preferences tab 0 00 c ee ees 270 Using the Audio preferences tab 00 0c eee ee ees 272 Setting advanced audio preferences 2 00 ce ees 274 Using the Sync preferences tab sens conden ei ede vdte eee es 275 Setting advanced Sync preferences 2 cc ees 276 Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working correctly 281 Wh
47. appear as a hand dh 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete T he marker will be removed from your project T he marker numbers will remain the same Vegas Pro will not renumber the tags as you remove them For example if you have five markersin your project and delete markers 3 and 4 the remaining markers will be listed as 1 2 and 5 H owever as you add markers again Vegas Pro will begin numbering the missing sequence first GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 883 Working with regions Regions are sets that subdivide your project Typically regions identify ranges of time that you need to get back to later Regions can function as permanent time selections Placing and adjusting a region Region markers may be placed at the cursor position and at the beginning and end points of a time selection via the Insert menu or pressing the R key Region start Region end Marker bar Assignable FX Remove Assignable Fx Audio Envelopes To adjust a region marker do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on either the region s start or end point T he pointer will appear as a hand dm 2 Click and drag the marker to the new position along the timeline 3 Release the mouse to set the region marker 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to move either the region marker s start or end point CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING Ye Naming a region marker You may name a region mark
48. arcade ache titiece ue neared se Yeenacatuneck Gadd ack eracd wrt 142 Creating a track plug in chain 26 022 wiawtaeisieie ieee eek andaee eee aee aaa 142 Arranging the plug in s Chain order 2 0 0 0 00 c eee 145 Removing plug ins from achain 000 cece eee eee eee eee 147 Saving plug in chains as presetS 000 cece eee eee ees 148 Vegas Pro plug in reference 0 0 annn rnnr ees 149 Using the Equalization EQ plug in 2 0 0 ees 149 Using the Compression plug in 2 0 ce eee eee eee eeeaes 152 Using Noise Gate DIVO iis takki Bs Raa ee a ae a ee ee ee 156 Using the Dither plug in 4 s c0 shi dare oo eee Hoe Oo ee eee ee pace eee eens 158 Using track envelopes 0 00s 160 Adding a volume envelope 2 00 eee eee eee eee 160 Hiding the volume envelopes 2 ee eee 163 Removing track volume envelopes 00 ee eee annann nunnana 163 Adding a panning envelope 200 ce ee eee eee 164 Hiding the panning envelOpeS 00 cee eee 166 Removing track panning envelOpeS 0 00 c ee eee ee eee eee eee eeeaes 166 Mixing multiple tracks to a single track 0 eee eee 167 Using the Mixer sagaceraner es lataeetedeates ta dee 169 Using the IVIIXGr WINDOW 4 05 cob sedeidda eget head dsb45 ands bates 169 Viewing the Mixer window 0000 cc eee eens 169 Using the Mixer tool bar osis chee wee chad ced dadhiadeind et ded totem ane eis eawes 17
49. command markers can be used to display headlines captions link to web sites or any other function you define Vegas Pro includes several command types that you may add to a streaming media file Some command types are exclusive to either the W indows M edia or the R ealM edia player Command Player type Description URL Windows Media Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s internet browser to change the and RealMedia content being displayed With this command you enter the URL that will display at a specific time during the rendered project s playback Text Windows Media Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that will display during playback WMClosedCaption Windows Media Displays the entered text in the captioning window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMTextBodyText Window Media Displays the entered text in the text window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMtTextHeadline Windows Media Displays the entered text in the headline window that is defined by an HTML layout file Title RealMedia Displays the entered text on the RealPlayer s title bar Author RealMedia Displays the entered text Author s name when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu Copyright RealMedia Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut men
50. compatible applications Plug In Chain Plug ins can strung together into achain so that the output of one effect feeds into the input of another This allows for complex effects that couldn t otherwise be created Pre roll Post roll Pre roll isthe amount of time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll isthe amount of time after the event T he time selection defines the pre and post roll when recording into a selected event GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B m 293 Preset A snapshot of the current settings in a plug in Presets are created and named so that you can easily get back to a sound that you have previously created A preset calls up a bulk setting of a function in Vegas Pro If you like the way you tweaked that EQ but do not want to have to spend the time getting it back for later use save it asa preset A Il presets show up in the combo box on the top of most function dialogs in Vegas Pro Pulse Code Modulation PCM PCM isthe most common representation of uncompressed audio signals T his method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage Punch In Punching in during recording means automatically starting and stopping recording at user specified times OQuadraphonic A mixing implementation that allows for four 4 discrete audio channels T hese are usually routed to two 2 front speakers and two back speakers to create immersive audio mixes Quantization T he process by which mea
51. descriptions for easier reference while working on your project You may only rename the active take name For more information see Choosing an active take after loop recording on page 209 To rename an event take do the following 1 Click the recorded event to select it The event being displayed is the active take 2 Right click on the selected event to display a shortcut menu Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E Switches ae Choose Active Properties Delete Active Delete Insert Empty Evert Zoom S lection Chri Up Deltas FP Track 1 Recording 10 Take 1 Track 1 Recording 10 Take 2 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename Active T he take s name will appear in a text box in the lower left portion of the event The event s take name will be selected Before eT rename After take rename 4 Type anew name in the text box 5 Pressthe key to save the new take name or click outside the text box 6 Repeat steps 1 5 to rename the other takes in the event Remember to make a take active before renaming it a Note You may change event names via the event s properties For more information see Changing the active take s name on page 104 EEeESESES RECORDING CHP 8 oa Deleting an event take Vegas Pro allows you delete unwanted recorded takes from your project Deleting a take does not remove the eve
52. display the Video Preview window and move it to the Docking A rea T his way we can watch the video as it is played back 1 From the View menu choose Video Preview T he Video Preview window appears yf Toolbar SF 3204240 820x240 15 000 fps w Status Bar Video Ruler w Explorer SONIC FOUNDRY w Trimmer w Miner Edit Details Plug In Video Preview Alt 6 2 Place the mouse pointer on the Video Preview s title bar and drag it to the lower right portion of the work area over the M ixer window oe Storage E i Sounds sf Tutorial SONIC FOUNDRY Explorer Trimmer Video Preview lt Mixer 3 W hen the Video Preview s title bar disappears release the mouse T he Video Preview window docks into position below the Track View CHP 3 TUTORIAL B 2 pS Playing back the video During playback you will see and hear a number of elements an opening and closing graphic with a music sound track and background noise recorded along with our narrator 1 Pressthe button on the Transport bar to start playback Playback begins at the current cursor position So if playback starts in the middle of the project press the i button to start playback from the beginning Transport bar 9 a gt gt EKA KY 2 Pressthe button to stop playback 3 Press the audio track s x button to mute the video s audio track Track mute W e are preparing to place and work with the new voice over
53. dock into place To move the Toolbar from its preset location do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the move handle located on the left side of the Toolbar Drag the Toolbar to desired location Soa We Ye a oo a te CR g ya To dock the Toolbar Sloe We BS Bl e im lo colle ee BR tay drag it back to the Menu bar E 2 Click and drag the Toolbar to the desired location N otice that the Toolbar now has a title bar 3 Release the mouse to drop the Toolbar on the Vegas Pro workspace eT Note To return the Toolbar to its preset position simply drag it up to the Menu bar and release the mouse The Toolbar will automatically dock in position 7 a CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 256 pS Resizing the Toolbar Vegas Pro allows you to resize the Toolbar after it has been moved away from the original docked position and is floating on the interface To resize the Toolbar do the following 1 Click and drag the Toolbar s frame in a horizontal or vertical direction 2 Release the mouse when the Toolbar is at the preferred size Hiding and displaying the Toolbar You may hide the Toolbar to create more workspace or if you prefer to use the Vegas Pro shortcut keys for editing and arranging For more information see Keyboard command reference on page 25 A fter the Toolbar is hidden you may display it again where it will appear in its preset position below the M enu bar Hid
54. double click Video placed on ruler and audio on a new track Video with audio event placed Drag drop or double click Audio on new track Video with audio event placed Drag drop to video ruler Video placed on ruler and audio on a new track Video only event placed Double click No affect existing video is not replaced Audio event basics T here are a number of ways to work with events once they have been placed in your project W hether you are working to achieve a specific project goal or experimenting with sound and video the events that you placed are fully editable T he following sections describe basic event editing techniques Moving events along the timeline An event by definition is an occurrence along the project s timeline Events as a result may by moved along the timeline either individually or asa group T he left edge of an event isits starting point Therefore where the left edge lines up on the ruler determines when the event starts Events may overlap each other or be placed on top of each other You may crossfade overlapping events automatically or with envelopes QUICK START CHP 2 35 Moving a single event You can move an event along the timeline within a track or move it to a different track 1 Select the event by clicking on it The event is highlighted 2 Click and drag the event along the timeline If you move the event along the original track s timeline the event s appearance color remains t
55. eee eee e eee eee 220 Rending to a streaming media format 00000 cee eee eee eee eee 221 Using rendering format controls and templates 222 Using aif controls and templates 000 cece ee ee eee eee 223 Using wav controls and templates 0 00 cc ee eee 225 Using mp3 controls and templateS 000 cee eee eee eee ee 227 Using wma controls and templates 0 000 ee ee eee 230 Using avi controls and templates 0000 eee 232 Using asf controls and templates 0 ccc cee ee eee eee eee eae 236 Using rm controls and templates 0000 eee 239 Customizing Vegas Pro 000e eee eee eee 243 Dockable Vegas Pro windows 000 0c ees 243 DOCKING a WINDOW eiere eere e ahi a ae asa ee a re ee ees 244 Using the Explorer WINdOW 0000 cece ee eee eee eee 245 Managing your media files 00 ee ee ee eee eee eee eeeaes 246 Using the Explorer window Transport bar 0200 cece eee eee eaee 250 Changing the Explorer window VIEWS 0 0 2 0 eee ee eee es 251 Changing the Ruler settings 20000 ee eee ees 253 ICE SI AC WAG eto es attend erensaiceed eran E Acasa Aca ae E Re 254 Working with the Toolbar 00 ccc ee eee eee ees 255 NIOVING tNe Toolbar 2 4 023 02 0ceeies eee aaa eee mae eae Sold foley 255 Resizing the Toolbar ci3 4 6 8 ecb ie Bice Beceing ee Soe Poe ied awe ee eer edaiesan ss 256 Hiding
56. have saved a file that contains Scott Studios data The Send application allows you to send the newly created file to several different network locations Allows you to set Vegas Pro to your language preference The following list describes how to work with the General tab e To enable or disable a feature click in its check box e Click the Default All button to return the General tab to its default settings e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Preferences dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Preferences dialog CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 270 SSS Using the Routing preferences tab T he Routing tab allows you to configure Vegas Pro to the equipment that is connected to your computer W hen you installed Vegas Pro it automatically determined the hardware available for output on your computer T hese options are available on the Routing tab Preferences 24 x General Routing Audio Sync Bus to hardware assignments Use Microsoft Sound Mapper for all busses C Use a custom bus routing Po Preview Microsoft Sound Mapper Bus D jus F eE 33539 33a E Default recording device DPL3 5A Recording fed Default All Cancel Apply In the table on this tab you will see virtual bus designations that you may add to a proj
57. hen you release the mouse Vegas Pro automatically creates new tracks as needed for events ee LS Moving events to different tracks 4 Release the mouse to set the events timeline occurrences 5 Repeat Steps 1 4 to move more events collectively along the timeline Track navigation Oncean event is placed on a track Vegas Pro automatically displays track controls that you can use to affect the event or events contained within the track EF ate ee eae 00 00 15 l e a l 1 1 11 1 1 1_1 1 1 e A i Track Track Arm for number View Effects Bus Record Mute Solo 4p AO Xx J Track Number T his area identifies the track s order number in a multitrack project You may rearrange the track order by dragging and dropping selected tracks up or down within the Track List Track color Change the color by right clicking Wok 0 0 dE and choosing Duplicate Track Track Color and Insert Audio Track Ctrl O then selecting the ee color you prefer Insert Remove Envelope ptr OO 2 Sa wi Rename QUICK START CHP 2 37 View buttons T hese buttons control the track s appearance size in the Track View Qo aE Normal E Maximized Track FX button This button accesses N oise G ate equalization EQ and compression FX controls that can be applied to the track s event s For more information see Using Track FX on page 142 Noise Gate FX t _
58. hitt Trim Erap Etri Split 5 Undo All Clear Edit History Vegas Pro displays the Paste R epeat dialog Specify the number of times to paste the clipboard events and their space from each other CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING Paste Repeat EE Number of times to paste F Paste spacing i End to end i 5 econdz Milizeconds Frames Measures Quarter Notes Quarter Note Triple ath Notes 8th Mote Triplets 16th Hotes 16th Note Triplets 2nd Notes 32nd Note Tripl f Even spacing Paste every 0 000 Seconds ets Press the OK button to paste the clipboard events the number of times you specified Vegas Pro begins pasting from the cursor s position along the timeline The clipboard contents are pasted one after another unless you have specified a paste spacing In that case a space will appear between each pasted event Paste insert Ctrl Shift V Clipboard events are placed at the cursor position on the selected track Existing events on a track are moved later in the timeline by the total length of pasted information A fter you have made your selection and copied it to the clipboard do one of the following e Press the ctri snift 4 v keys From the Edit menu choose Paste Insert Undo Event Crossfade Change Chl 2 Delete Delete Paste Repeat Ctrl B Paste Insert Ctrl hift Trim Erap fet Fl Split 5 Undo All Clear Edit History Clipboard contents Events before paste Even
59. list You may delete takes from alist when you have chosen the one that you want to use in your project You may delete multiple event takes at a time To delete event takes from a list do the following 1 Click on the event take to select it 2 Right click on the event to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Takes and then Delete from the sub menu T he Delete Takes dialog will appear Or from the Edit menu choose Takes and then Delete from the sub menu T he Delete Takes dialog will appear F a Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E Switches a Rename Active Group Choose Active Properties Delete Active Delete Takes DeltaSFXP Delete takels Track 1 Recording 10 Take 1 Track 1 Recording 10 Take 2 Track 1 Recording 10 Take 1 Track 1 Recording 10 Take 2 Undo Delete Take Ctrl Redo Delete Active Take Chrl Shift 2 Ld Cancel Switches Choose Ative Te ea Play Stop Delete Active Select All Ctrl 4 Delete Undo All Clear Edit History 4 Select the event take that you want to remove Click the play button to confirm that the selected event isthe one you want to remove a Note To select multiple event takes hold down either the or keys _ 5 Click the OK button to remove the selected event take s from your project RECORDING CHP 8 213 Specifying where
60. may add any DirectX compatible plug ins or a chain of plug ins to a bus W hen you add plug ins to a bus the track signals that are assigned to the bus will be processed by the plug in s to create the desired output H owever if plug ins are assigned at the track level EQ or Compression for example the track s signal will flow through the track s plug in s before the bus plug ins For more information see Signal Flow on page 28 Bus plug in chains may be added at any time Once plug in chains are added to a bus you may remove or add specific plug ins until you achieve the desired output lt o lt lt ooioqoqoqoo Note DirectX plug ins must be installed on your computer prior to adding them eK There are two ways to create bus plug in chains via the Plug in Chooser dialog and via the Plug in Explorer window Adding plug in chains via the Plug in Chooser dialog To add plug in chains to a bus do the following 1 Click on the Bus FX button 2 The Plug in Chooser dialog appears F E a Bus A Plug In Chooser HE a rx fed Ale X El ok Audio eo FX Chains H E Track Sonic Foundry Acoustic Mirror Sonic Foundry Graphic EO Ea Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation We Sonic Foundry Mult Band Dynamics Sonic Foundry Chorus WS Sonic Foundry Mult Tap Delay Add Sonic Foundry Click Removal WS onic Foundry Moise Gate Sonic Foundry Clipped Peak Restoration WS Sonic Foundry Noite Reduc
61. may arm multiple tracks prior to recording Once a track is armed you will see a record meter appear on the track s to be recorded into You will also see one of two recording device button appear fa or m The button that appears is based on the preferences routing tab For more information see Using the Routing preferences tab on page 270 Button Description foa Stereo This button appears when you have selected Use Microsoft Sound Mapper for all busses on the Preferences routing tab The Sound Mapper allows you to choose how the signal will be recorded stereo or mono Ji Mono left Click on this button to view a menu with Stereo Left or Right To record in mono choose either the left or a Mono right right channel prior to recording When you select either the left or right channel the button will change to reflect your choice for mono recording Stereo This button appears when you have selected Use custom bus routing on the Preferences routing tab When you choose this option you can specify which device you will record from on any given track prior to Mono left recording Click on this button to view a menu with all available devices and Stereo Left or Right You Mono right may record in stereo or mono The device that you select will have a number assigned to it This number will appear on the button Arm the track first Track is ready for recording Track is ready for recording using the Sound Mapper using your custom
62. media player 00 eee eee 44 Using project properties sannana nunana 45 Saving the Dro CCl srecu ek hase ae eee ec asec hie eee Ae awe 45 Saving your project the first time auauna ee eee ees 45 Renaming or rendering a project using Save As 2 nannu annann 46 Rendering a Vegas project 0 cc eee ee eee eee 47 TAOCA anca a te eee tate tera ea ee ee 49 Getting the tutorial folder 000 e eee eee eee eee 49 Using the Explorer WINdOW 0220 00 cece eee eee ees 50 Placing LAG videO see idane Aonswtesw wii wn Soka eran ded ete hw tec eee ca 50 Displaying the Video Preview 200 ccc eee eee 51 Playing Dack the VideO ii eh Ra RA ee ea EPS a a bee eee Pee 52 Placing the new VOICE OVEr 2 eee eens 52 Aligning new voice over with video 0 00 ees 53 Editing the VOICG OVEr 1 eee 54 LOCKING the original audio eee RG ek ee a ak Sok Pee eee 54 Editing a time selection 65 6 ne eee e eine eth et 4a eek ede ewe seeo dee ie sin vine 55 Splitting an event using time Selection 0 0 ees 55 EGIhiNnG an CVeMntjacsectuseduraerewt eehertaeteidsidsivstestesiv E i 56 Aligning the remaining voice over eventS 000eee0008 56 Grouping the voice over and video 00 0c eee eens 57 Oa Working with the music bed 000e cece cece cece ee eeaees 58 Placing the music bed niche etter teed b idee eee oe eee hione tee es 58 Adding a
63. name the new name will appear in the event s Take list that you may access by doing the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Take A sub menu list of takes will appear Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Cut Chrl Switches a Rename Active Group t Choose Active Properties Delete Active Delete ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 45 CHP 5 Displaying take names on event You may also see the take names right on the events in the Track View T he events in your project will display their respective active take names in the lower left portion of the waveform Enable the Show active take names in events check box on the Preferences dialog to use this feature To enable this preference do the following 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences T he Preferences dialog will appear Preferences mes General Routing Audio Sync w Enable Snapping Fe General Preferences w Snap To Grid Chri F8 w Snap To Markers Shift F8 Options Automatically open last project on startup Show logo splash screen on startup KIKRE c Show a Tip of the Day on startup T Show active take name in events raw waveforms in events T1444 IV Recently used project list 6 g Choose Language j English X Default All 2 Click the Show active take names in events check box to enable it 3 Click the OK button to set the p
64. of a time selection You may also place a region on the fly while the media file is playing back A region appears as green tags above the ruler Marker m Region a A g 00 00 00 ix 20 00 05 1 ass 00 00 15 Rone salma DA a T To add markers or regions do the following 1 Position the cursor or make a time selection 2 Place the marker or region in one of the following ways From the Insert menu choose Marker OF Region Right click on the Trimmer M arker bar and choose Marker Or Region from the shortcut menu e Press the M marker or R region shortcut Keys 3 Click the fij button to save the markers and regions to the media file A fter a marker or region is placed you may move rename and delete them from the media file T hese procedures are identical to project markers and regions For more information see Using project markers and regions on page 80 CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 1 24 j Opening the sound editor from the Trimmer The Trimmer allows you to open your selected sound editor application to preform destructive edits to the media file A fter you make the necessary changes and save the file in the sound editor Vegas Pro will automatically update the event using that media file H owever remember to keep the media file s name and location the same O therwise you will need to import the edited media file into Vegas Pro again For more information see Using a sound editor progr
65. pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation T he difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor isnot This resultsin a difference in processing speed Dithering T he practice of adding noise to a signal to mask quantization noise Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse in Vegas Pro To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B mum I2 Dynamic Range T he difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor For example orchestral music has a wide dynamic range while thrash metal has a very small always loud range Endian Little and Big Little and Big Endian describe the ordering of mult
66. process everything on the selected track T hisinterface however requires plug ins with special DirectX extensions Some DirectX plug ins do not have this extension Check your with your plug in manufacturer to confirm whether it supports the Vegas Pro Track FX interface To use standard DirectX plug ins use the Bus FX or Assignable FX which you can add to the Mixer window For more information see Using the Mixer on page 169 Vegas Pro includes four built in plug ins Equalization EQ Compression N oise Gate and Dither that can be used at the track level in any order you specify T hese plug ins can be accessed by clicking the Track FX button Creating a track plug in chain You may create a plug in chain and control which plug in to include A plug in chain can contain one or more plug ins W hen you add multiple plug ins you may set their order that the track will use when playing back M oreover the plug ins you place in the chain may be added to occur more than once For example a plug in chain can look something like the following EQ Compression EQ and N oise Gate A fter the plug in chain is created the entire track will be processed by each plug in their respective order T he plug ins are cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange their order to achieve the desired playback sound T here are two ways to create plug ins chains via the Plug in Chooser dialog and via the Plug in Explorer window Adding pl
67. register via the Sonic Foundry web site or via the telephone Registering online W hen you register online your activation code is sent to your email address within minutes after you complete and submit the online registration form To register online do the following 1 Select the second radio button labeled would like to register online 2 Click the pasm button Your internet browser automatically starts if it is not already running and the Sonic Foundry online registration form appears CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 1w6y 3 Fill in the form s required fields which are indicated with an asterisk You will notice that some of the information is already inserted for you most notably the Computer ID number 4 M ake sure that your email address is entered correctly T his address is where the activation code will be sent 5 Submit the form to register In a few minutes your activation code is sent to your email address 6 Copy the activation code from the email message and paste it into the registration field on the Vegas Pro Registration dialog 7 Click the button to activate Vegas Pro and become a fully registered customer Registering via the telephone W hen you register via telephone a Customer Service Representative will help you to obtain your activation code To register via telephone do the following 1 Select the third radio button labeled would like to register over the phone
68. respectively A fter that you can reload them into Vegas Pro re synchronize them and the synchronization will stay constant Some AVI s that open in Windows Media Player don t open in Vegas Pro Some newer AVI files use codecs that are unreadable by applications that do not support Microsoft DirectShow codecs T hese files are usually either compressed with a DV or M PEG 4 codec T hey might also be larger than the standard AV file limit of 4 Gigabytes V egas Pro does not currently support these files Why does a mono event increase 6 dB when panning a track hard to either side In Vegas Pro all audio events on tracks is stereo So a mono audio event is interpreted asa stereo event with the same data in both channels T he Vegas Pro track pan control preserves some amount of stereo separation when panning a stereo signal and gradually mixes the level from channel to channel T herefore with a mono audio event Vegas Pro is adding a duplicate of the event on top of itself T his duplication doubles the amplitude and results in a 6 dB increase in volume when you pan a track hard left or right To compensate for this increase adjust the tracks volume with the fader Or lower the event s sustain portion using an event envelope A SR For more information see Using event envelopes ASR on page 113 TROUBLESHOOTINGAPPENDIX A 285 APPENDIX Glossary f w a i i A Law A companded compression algorithm for voice signals de
69. s view For more information see Changing track height on page 135 1 Press ait 0 so the Track View takes focus of keyboard commands Or click in the Track View 2 Press and hold the ctri snift keys 3 Press either the A or w keys You will toggle through different Track heights 4 Click and drag the new voice over s starting point to approximately when the narrator begins to speak T he original audio waveform although distorted reveals the narrator s voice Original audio Voice over Selection bar 00 00 02 onoo0 CHP 3 TUTORIAL 54 jp 6 Press the gt or i button to play just the time selection Press the button on the Transport bar to have playback loop continuously within the selection 7 W atch the Video Preview window to see If the new voice over Is close 8 Pressthe button to stop playback 9 Repeat steps 3 7 until you have the starting points of the voice over and the video synchronized N ext we will edit the ums from the voice over and synchronize the remaining voice over with the video Editing the voice over W hen you played back the new voice over you noticed the interruption errors that it contained We will remove those errors and synchronize the remaining voice over to the video Vegas Pro allows you to edit both time and events We will use both methods to edit the voice over In addition we will split an event to separate it from the parts we
70. s volume T herefore the Compression plug in is very useful during the mastering process because you can play back the track loudly yet listen to clear undistorted sound BES Click the push pin to keep VAEA the Track FX dialog open on the workspace untied gt i x 2 Keep Visible Input meter ee LMM Inf Output meter RSE ERI IS Reduction meter displays Reduction dB i lt 4 amount of reduction being Sompression Threshold 48 E fm foo applied to the track controls Amount 1 LE gy fia Attack ms aly js Release ma s I mm HIH 250 M Auto gain compensation Smooth saturation Controlling clipping T he Compression plug in hastwo meters that allow you to monitor both the input and output signals If either signal clips these meters will display in red at the end with a clipping value A djust the Compression controls and click the red area with the clipping value to reset the meter ene sm Ping signal with dB value Input Gain dE FF e Click the clipping indicator to reset the meter 12 to dE 24 to dE l 42 to D dE Output Gain dB Output Gain dE 60 to 0 dB EE ooe w Show Labels w Hold Peaks Hold Valleys Input Gain dE E Reduction dE Reset meter Input Gain dE Right click to reset clip change meter resolution and set the meter to hold peaks and valleys You may also reset the clip from the shortcut menu whe
71. seconds measures and beats frames etc on Ruler 00 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 30 Of 00 45 _ a a A A E LSe 1 1 1 E 1 1 N pore yep fy pee eer fy l 1 1 1 I1 Track List Right click Samples Seconds Time amp Frames Absolute Frames Measures amp Beats SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Film Sync 24 fos Feet and Frames 16mm 40 tpt Feet and Frames 35mm 16 tpt Edit Ruler Offset This list identifies the track order in your project Each track s controls are also available in the Track List 00 00 00 ey toes Track Number Track controls CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 22 Track View A Il arranging and editing is done in the Track View This area contains all the project s events Track View UT Transport bar controls T he Transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on your project R D gt EKA KY T Record into track 2 Loop play back jp Play back from beginning of project Stop playback Move cursor to start of project Move cursor to end of project gt Play back project from cursor position Move cursor left at grid increments g 2 zl Z E Ail Pause project playback Move cursor right at grid increments Scrub control T he Scrub control is used to play your project forward or backward for editing purposes You may adju
72. setup 141 Redo command 78 series of edits 78 Redo U ndo commands 77 79 clearing history 79 Region 83 deleting 85 naming 84 navigating 85 placing and adjusting 83 Selecting 84 Registering Vegas Pro 15 online 15 telephone 16 Removing track plug ins from FX Plug in Chooser dialog 147 from Track FX dialog 147 Removing plug ins 147 Renaming a project Save As 46 216 Rendering AIFF aif 219 M PEG mp3 219 RealM edia rm 221 Video for W indows avi 220 Wave M icrosoft wav 219 Windows M edia A udio wma 219 S Windows M edia Format asf 221 Rendering a project 47 62 218 241 audio formats 219 controls and templates 222 format options 47 62 218 streaming formats 221 video format 220 Reordering tracks 134 Ripple editing 98 102 cutting events 98 cutting time and event selection 99 cutting time selection 99 deleting events 100 deleting time and event selection 100 deleting time selection 100 pasting events 101 pasting multitrack information 102 pasting track information 101 Routing hardware preferences 270 Ruler 21 changing settings 253 offset setting 254 property settings 267 time formats 253 Saving a project 45 61 215 241 first time 45 options 45 215 SavingAs project 216 Saving A s dialog commands 217 Scott Studio commands 86 269 Scribble Strip 39 Scrub control 22 Selection Edit tool 67 Serial Num
73. that occur within the range If you are editing the time range only events that occur within the time range will be affected Only the events within I the time selection will be affected by edits or be played back CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 8 To select a time range do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the M arker bar The mouse pointer includes a left right arrow f 2 Click and drag to select the region All events or portions of events within the region are highlighted 3 Place the mouse pointer over the time selection s start or end point to increase or decrease your time range selection a Note You may move the entire selection range by dragging the Time selection bar EE MMMIi i iii iS If you want to play back the time range press the Play button to listen to only the events within the time range Press the Loop button to have Vegas Pro continually play back the events within the time selection Selecting events and a time range Selecting a time range does not automatically select events It simply selects a time frame of the project Excluding locked events all items within the time range will play back and be affected by Edit menu commands such as cutting pasting etc H owever you may select specific events to edit or play back and then select a time range 1 Use the ctri key the key or the Selection Ed
74. the event Click either to select the track If you are pasting multiple events from different tracks Vegas Pro automatically creates new tracks as needed for events or simply places events in existing tracks 4 Paste the event into the track by doing one of the following ma r Press the ctrl v keys Undo Size Event s Ctrl 2 e Click the Paste button on the Toolbar e From the Edit menu choose Paste Clipboard information is pasted at the cursor s position on the selected me track Existing track events or portions of events after the cursor are adjusted to occur later in the project The amount of adjustment is based on the total length of the information being pasted Pasting single track information with ripple mode The information on the clipboard determines how many tracks will be affected when you paste If you have copied or cut information from one track only the selected track will be affected by the pasted event and time information Clipboard contents Events before paste Events after paste 00 00 15 Existing event is F 3 E l pae ee adjusted later in Er e Cwm the project Paste A Newly pasted 4 gt position arei CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 102 Pasting multitrack information with ripple mode W hen you have copied or cut information from multiple tracks how the information is pasted is determined by the track that you select for the paste V egas Pro
75. the event Track envelopes affect the entire track and do not move with the events W hen you place an event into your project Vegas Pro adds handles that are used to set the envelope A s you use these handles a volume line will appear indicating how the event is being affected Also the waveform will graphically display the volume change G Envelope handles Volume line Setting an event s volume W hen you place the mouse pointer at the top of the event the pointer changes to a hand cursor dwt with which you may use to lower the event s overall volume To set the event s volume do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event 2 W hen you see the envelope cursor dy click and drag the volume line to the desired level A s you drag the volume line down Vegas Pro displays the event s decibel level Volume line Gain is 2 7 dB Decibel level 3 Release the mouse to set the volume Setting an event s fade in and out The event handles allow you to affect an event s fade in and out volume A Iso you can change the type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade in or out To set the event s fade in or out do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle and the pointer changes to the envelope cursor 4 CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 9114p 2 Click and drag the envelope cursor the volume line appears A s you drag the cursor Vega
76. the project s bus into a stereo file For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 2 stereo files Therefore each bus in your project and the tracks assigned to the bus are rendered into a single stereo file SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 C227 Saving a wav rendering template You may create your own wav templates by doing the following 1 In the Template field enter a name Audio Template My wav Template Li x 2 From the drop down lists on the A udio tab choose the settings that you want the template to use 3 Click the i button to save the template You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list making your setting changes and clicking the button a Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the button eS Using mp3 controls and templates Vegas Pro allows you to render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in T his feature gives you the opportunity to try the plug in A fter the 20th mp3 file is created you need to purchase the plug in to create more mp3 files To access this format s controls click the Custom button on the Save A s dialog The MPEG 1 Layer 3 Templates dialog appears MPEG 1 Layer 3 Templates E E Template Project Defaut wl x Description K a stereo 128 kbps MP3 file Settings cancel _ CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 2 2 8
77. threshold control that determines what level of signal may pass through the gate Signals that exist below the threshold are prevented from passing through the gate closes whereas signals above the threshold are allowed to pass through the gate opens Click the push pin to keep the Track FX dialog open on the workspace keep Visible HIH Release time 1 to 5 000 ms 100 HH Threshold level lnf to 0 dE Presets T he drop down list allows you to automatically set the N oise G ate plug in controls by choosing one of the included presets You may save custom presets for use on other tracks ofi Track Noise Gate o Untitled Default all parameters aoe Select a preset from the Noise gate 2 list or save your own preset Slow attack Strong beats onl To save your own N oise Gate presets do the following 1 Enter a preset name in the drop down list field 2 Set the N oise Gate controls that you want to customize 3 Click the fi button to save the preset Fl Note You may delete any presets by selecting it from the list and clicking the button ss WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 R 157 Threshold level OdB to inf control Inf dB Threshold level lnf to 0 dB This control allows you to set the signal s threshold level Signals below this level will be eliminated muted while signals above the threshold will remain in the output sound If the threshold level is
78. time selection are removed from the project N on selected events remain T he time information within the selection isnot removed Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not placed on the clipboard 000s Delete event selection Selected events are removed from the project T he time information between events is not removed Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not placed on the clipboard SY eee Sy eee rool Pr dt LL tes d ns dd H GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 nn A77 Using the Undo and Redo commands Vegas Pro gives you unlimited undo and redo functionality while working on your project W hile you are working with a project Vegas Pro creates an undo history of the edits that you performed Each time you undo something that edit is placed in the redo history H owever if a redo history exists and you perform another edit the redo history is cleared W hen you close the project or exit Vegas Pro both the undo and redo histories are cleared Undo command Pressing the ctri z keys or U ndo i button on the Toolbar will undo the last edit performed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or Toolbar button will continue undoing edits in reverse order M oreover you may undo the last edit by choosing It from the Edit menu it will be the first item on the menu Undo last edit Undoing a series of edits The undo h
79. want to keep Locking the original audio Time selection edits affect all tracks in the project unless a specific Track is selected Before we start editing the voice over we will lock the original audio which is our reference to prevent it from accidently being edited too 1 Click the video s original audio to select it 2 From the Edit menu choose Switches and then Lock Undo Track Volume Level Change s Chrl 2 Fant peda Erer Mute Take Group t Loop Normalize Select All Chrl 4 Undo All Clear Edit History TUTORIAL CHP 3 55 Editing a time selection By looking at the waveform you will see where the um and cough occur You will also see where the narrator is speaking W e will delete the um using time selection 1 On the timeline click and drag to make a time selection where the um occurs 2 Press the button to play back the error to ensure that your time selection does not include part of the voice over that we need 3 Increase or decrease the time selection by clicking and dragging an edge of the selection 4 Once the time selection is made choose Delete from the Edit menu or press the key to remove the um N ext we will split the event that contains the narrator s cough and then delete the error Splitting an event using time selection CHP 3 Splitting creates events from an existing one We will make a time selection that con
80. which can be used for streaming via the Web W hen you render to this format Vegas Pro displays the Encoding Template W izard that carries you through the rendering encoding process A Iso the rm format allows you to set up R edirector settings which will appear on the RealPlayer Click the Redirector button to display the RealM edia Redirector File Setting dialog RealMedia Redirector File Settings Server path e g rep mediaserver mediafalder itsp mediaserver mediafolder cae Enter path to multimedia server Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Template T1 Video hi 26 8 Audio Stereo BB Dial up Modem Audio Mona FB Dial up Modem Audio Stereo 100 Audio Dial up Modem Mult rate Video Dial up Modem Corporate Interet Mult rate Video 26 8 Video Voice 26 8 Video Audio Emphasis BB Dial up Modem Video Audio Emphasis BE Video Smooth Motion Music ISON Corporate Internet Mult rate Video T1 Video SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 2 4 0 SSS Saving an rm rendering template You may create your own rm templates by clicking the Custom button on theSaveAs dialog The Edit Template dialog will appear Template 28 8 Audio Only f Selected template Template Description For delivery of high quality audio content to 28 8 baud modems or above Good for rad
81. with the plug ins that are loaded on your system from the Plug in Chooser dialog USING THE MIXER CHP 7 199 CHAPTER w scg W E 5 8 gt Th es as a an a Tii r a Pat lt b ee Vegas Pro will record into multiple mono or stereo audio tracks while simultaneously playing back existing audio tracks You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware You may record into an empty track a time selection an event ora combination of time and selection A udio playback during recording is not recorded with the new audio Recording oe T Recording in Vegas Pro isa non destructive operation Even when recording into an existing event you are not overwriting the data that is already displayed in that event Instead the data is recorded into a new take for that event Setting up your equipment Following are general setup scenarios T here are numerous ways to connect your equipment to your system Refer to your equipment s documentation for specific setup instructions Basic setup This setup includes a simple microphone and speaker that are connected to the computer s sound card W ith a more sophisticated microphone you would typically want to use a preamplifier for input to the sound card Sound card out Sound card in CHP 8 RECORDING 2 0 0 Setup with mixer T his setup includes a mixer where the s
82. within the time selection will be split and the recorded data will be placed into the time selection For more information see Recording into an event with a time selection on page 207 The recorded event like all events in your project will have a source media file By default Vegas Pro stores recorded media files in the Vegas Pro program folder H owever you may specify where recorded media files are stored For more information see Specifying where recordings are stored on page 213 To record into atime selection do the following 1 Click the Arm for Record button on the desired track a Note To select multiple tracks click them while pressing either the or keys LEE 2 Choose the input device from which the track will record pg 202 3 Choose the recording method that the track will use pg 202 4 On the Marker bar click and drag to make the time selection You may adjust the time CHP 8 selection by dragging the selection bar s starting and ending points 51 Time selection bar Click the Record button on the Transport bar to begin recording Vegas Pro will display the event s waveform as it is recorded and automatically stop recording when the cursor reaches the end of the time selection To record multiple takes click the Loop play button on the Transport bar For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 208 m Loop play R D gt EKA KY
83. your project to the state to include those edits W hen you redo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the undo history again A t this point the redo history is cleared when a new edit is performed earing the edit history You may clear both undo and redo histories without closing your project or exiting Vegas Pro Once the histories have been cleared Vegas Pro will begin creating new ones as you continue working on the project To clear the edit histories do the following 1 From the Edit menu choose Clear Edit History A confirmation dialog will appear Sonic Foundry Yegas Pro Es Undo Move Event Ctrl has EeclaMowe swat E gt 2 This command will clear the edit history for the project After doing this you will be unable to undo changes you have made Are you sure you want to clear the edit history for the project 2 Click the Yes button to clear the edit histories Or click the No button to cancel and keep the edit histories GENERAL EDITING 0 pS Using project markers and regions Vegas Pro allows you to use three types of project markers that identify parts of your project and provide functionality for rendered projects The three types of markers are Markers points that you place along the project s timeline T hey are typically used to mark interesting parts in the project for later reference Regions sets that subdivide your project Typically regions identify ranges of time that you nee
84. 0 RAM 27MB 1 zae GRRE 60 Disk usage meter GAO M 1014 AM To optimize the reading of data off the hard drive try the following 1 Fully defragment your audio hard drives regularly 2 Split audio usage between different physical hard drives not just different partitions of the same drive TROUBLESHOOTINGAPPENDIX A e ns 9383 3 Run fewer events simultaneously It is not how many tracks you have in the project but how many different events are playing simultaneously that matters 4 M ake sure that you trim out any silent sections of events to minimize the wasted disk access 5 U se hard drives with fast seek times and spindle speeds of 7200 RPM or greater SCSI drives have better prolonged data transfer performance than IDE drives CPU usage If neither the RAM or Disk meter looks out of the ordinary you can try to adjust how V egas Pro utilizes the central processing unit CPU To optimize CPU usage try the following 1 If you are using video turn off the Animate video strip option on the Preferences G eneral tab Options Preferences i Ea Enable Snapping Fa Snap lio Erid Etri teg General Routing Audio Syne s Snap iio Maker Shirtke General Preferences Show active take name in events Draw waveforms in events Animate video ruler Number video frames Prompt to keep files after recording M Create Undos for FX parameter changes 2 Zoom out ctri fully on the Track Vi
85. 0 Using the Mixer Preview fader 00 ccc eee eee eee eee ees 170 SING DUSSES te esas coe te ar se sincera a teste dt decal te ald tre atl tended tae ode 173 Adding busses to the project a nunun aranan eee eee eee eee eee eee 173 Deleting busses from the project 000 20 e eee eee 175 Routing busses to hardware 0 000 cece eee ee teeta 176 Working with DUSSES 5 i aroi aad eae awe meet ateer aha etaa ta eted Saabs Subs eas 177 Adding plug in chains to DUSSES 2 2 00 eens 181 Arranging bus plug ins on the Chain nananana nannan eee 183 Deleting plug ins from the bus Chain 0 0 eee 185 i ___ ii Using Assignable FX controls 0 2 00 c eee eee eee ees 186 Adding Assignable FX controls 00c cece eee eee eee teens 186 Arranging Assignable FX plug ins on the chain 00000 cece eee ees 189 Routing Assignable FX to bUSSES nnana anaran ee eee 192 Working with Assignable FX controls 0 000 eee 192 Working with preset plug in Chains 00e0ee cece cece 196 Creating new preset plug in Chains 2000 00 e eee 196 Editing preset plug in chainS 00 cee eee ees 198 Organizing your pIUG INS nannan nanne eee 198 HeECOMGINGs isre pnr abt new eceee ora wee ane a 199 Setting up your equipment 2 0 00 ees 199 Basi eD eneren on ont oo Gees sas ee eames ec eae en see se Oust pda 199 SETUD WI
86. 0 x Encoder Output Options sample rate will improve the audio quality of the compressed output Bandwidth ak Net gt Cana He 5 Click the Next button to set the Resample rate from the drop down list Resample CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 232 z 6 Click the Next button to choose an audio format form the Format drop down list T here is only one A udio codes available from the A udio drop down list scription Creates CD quality stereo audio ASF content for clients A with high speed Internet and LAN i 7 Click the Finish button to save the template and return to the Edit Template dialog You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list clicking the Edit button starting the wizard again and making your setting changes SY Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the Delete button S a Using avi controls and templates T he avi file format is the standard for video files on the W indows operating systems in which the Vegas Pro project s audio and video is rendered to one file To access this format s controls click the Custom button on the Save A s dialog The Custom Setting dialog appears and has two tabs A udio and Video T he Attributes drop down list displays available choices dependent on the Format option that you choose T he following sections describe and display eac
87. 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker that you want to delete T he pointer will appear as a hand 4m oe ST Sa WG AML www sonictoundry com Edit a Sa a ee I ROG aoe ae Rename a ec 00 00 20 Delete 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete T he command marker will be removed from your project Using a sound editor program Vegas Pro isa non destructive editing environment which meansthat all the events data in your project is maintained and available as necessary Destructive edits may be done in a separate application such as Sonic Foundry s Sound Forge to modify an audio event s referenced file By setting up a separate sound editor you can quickly access the program from Vegas Pro via the Tools menu or ctrl E shortcut keys Setting up the sound editor program If you already had Sound Forge loaded on your computer when you installed Vegas Pro the installation should have detected it and made it your sound editor program H owever if you do not have Sound Forge or want to specify a different sound editor you may do so in the Preferences dialog To set up the sound editor program do the following 1 From the Options Menu choose Preferences T he Preferences dialog will appear Preferences i 1x Options General Routing Audio Sync w Enable Snapping Fa General Preferences F Iv Automatically open last project on startup Sn
88. 21 Zoom buttons These buttons are identical to the ones in the Track View pg 27 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 12 Showing an event in the Trimmer Showing an event in the Trimmer is actually displaying the event s referenced media file You may place a media file directly into the Trimmer from the Vegas Pro Explorer The main functions of the Trimmer are to select portions of a media file to place in the project or to add regions or markers to the media file for use later in other projects or a sound editor Showing an event from the Track View This procedure is typically used when you want to select a portion of the media file to place on tracksin your project or add regions or markers to the event s referenced media file To show an event s media file in the Trimmer do the following 1 Select the event 2 Right click to display ashortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Show in Trimmer The event s entire referenced media file will appear in the Trimmer window z Ea E 4Tutorialk Music bed way a li Show in Trimmer k a Open in Sound Forge 00 00 10 00 00 15 8a ti a a gt 1 K AW 000012997 Portion being used Note If the event in your project is only using L in the project a portion of a larger media file the Trimmer on rok will select the portion being used KA Entire media file CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 1 22 j Placing a media f
89. 3 Repeat steps 1 2 if necessary to duplicate more tracks Deleting a track You may delete tracks from your project and all events contained on them You may delete one track or choose multiple tracks to delete at atime To delete a track do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer over the track that you want to delete E Note To select multiple tracks click them while holding down either the key to select adjacent tracks or the key to select random tracks a ae 2 Right click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Or from the Edit menu choose Delete Undo Track Volume Level Change s Chrl 2 Fant Heda Et ESHA Cut Chrl Copy Ctrl C Paste etry Delete Delete Rene Duplicate Track Inzert Audio Track Undo All Delete Clear Edit History 3 Repeat steps 1 2 if necessary to delete more tracks CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 134 Naming or renaming a track Every track in your project has a Scribble Strip where you can type a name for the track The track name may be up to 255 characters If you do not see the Scribble Strip expand the track to reveal it W hen a track s view is minimized the Scribble Strip does not display You may name or rename the track at any time by doing the following 1 Double click in the Scribble Strip and type the track name Or right click the on the track to display a shortcut menu Choose Rename from the shortcut menu A ny existing name Is highlight
90. 45 215 shortcut 14 starting 14 Vegas Pro overview 19 28 Explorer window 23 Keyboard commands 25 Main window 19 Marker bar 20 Mixer window 24 Ruler 21 Scrub control 22 Toolbar 20 Track list 21 Track view 22 Transport bar 22 Trimmer window 24 Video preview window 24 Windows Docking Area 23 INDEX Vegas Pro windows docking 244 Video compression 63 Video event basics 41 moving alongtimeline 41 placement options 34 placing 34 50 removing audio 42 Video preview window 24 51 Video property settings 266 View buttons 37 View options tracks 135 Volume Assignable FX fader 140 auxiliary bus fader 139 track fader 136 Volume envelopes 160 163 adding 58 deleting from track s 163 hiding on track s 163 setting points 59 161 W Wave M Icrosoft bit depth 226 channels 226 formats 225 rendering 219 sample rate 226 saving a template 227 templates 225 W eb site help using 18 technical support 12 W hat sT his help using 17 W indow DockingA rea 23 244 W indows M edia A udio Microsoft encoding wizard 231 rendering 219 saving atemplate 231 template 230 XI W indows M edia Format asf Microsoft encoding wizard 237 redirector 236 rendering 221 saving a template 237 238 template 237 Windows M edia streaming command defined 86 INDEX INDEX
91. 6 bit PCM Stereo 46 kHz 16 bit PCM lt untitled gt The template s properties or parameters will be displayed in the other fields listed on the dialog For example the description sample rate bit depth etc may change depending on the template that you select Description This text box displays any information that was entered when the template was created Sample rate The sample rate you choose directly affects the audio s quality The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Sample rate 44 100 Bit depth The bit depth affects the audio s quality like the sample rate T he higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Bit depth CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 224 Channels You may render your project to channel types Stereo M ono M ultiple M ono and M ultiple Stereo Multiple Mora Multiple Stereo Channel Description Stereo Renders all the project s busses to a stereo file The signal is saved to the respective right and left channels that you specified in the project This may cause clipping in the rendered stereo file You can compensate for the clipping by reducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Mono Renders the project so that both the right and left channels are summed to one mono signal This may cause clipping in the mono file You can compensate for clipping by re
92. 8 M ute button 38 M uting a bus 179 M uting a track 137 M uting an Assignable FX 194 N N aming A ssignable FX 195 N aming busses 180 Naming tracks 134 N oise Gate plug in 156 attack time control 157 presets 156 release time control 157 threshold control 157 N ormalize peak level setting 274 N umbers activation code 15 serial 15 O Onlinehelp 17 accessing 17 icon 17 PDF manual 18 Tip of the day 18 viathe web 18 W hat s This help 17 Online registration 15 Organizing tracks 134 P Panning 40 164 166 Panning envelopes adding 164 deleting from track s 166 hiding from track s 166 setting points 165 INDEX vid MMMM Paste insert 72 Paste repeat 71 Pasting events 70 72 ripple mode 101 Pasting multitrack information ripple mode 102 Pasting track information ripple mode 101 PDF online manual 18 Pitch shift 106 Placing media astakes 33 double clicking 34 dragging dropping 33 multiple files 33 same track 33 separate tracks 33 Playback interpolate cursor position control 274 position bias control 275 pre roll buffer control 275 video 52 Playback buffer control 272 Playback buttons See Transport bar Plug in chain changing order 146 changing order from Track FX dialog 145 creating on tracks 142 Plug in chain presets saving track 148 Plug in chain changing order 145 183 Plug in reference 149 159 Preference set
93. CORDING CHP 8 203 Starting and stopping recording CHP 8 To start recording click the Record button on the Transport bar which is located just below the Track View R D gt gt EKA KY L Start stop L Stop recording recording Recorded waveform Depending on the recording selection you will see Vegas Pro create a waveform along the timeline as you record into the armed track s To stop recording click the Record button again or the Stop button m on the Transport bar A dialog will appear allowing you to rename delete or keep the wav file Recorded Files EA ES C Program Files Sonic Foundry Vegas 4 Track 2 Recording 18 way d Track 3 Recording 12 way d Track 5 Recording 2 wav d Track 6 Recording 2 wav Delete removes selected file Delete Rename Delete All Rename changes the name of a selected file Delete All removes all files in dialog IY Show after every recording session Don returns to Track View When a check mark appears in this box Vegas Pro will display this dialog after each recording session RECORDING 2 04 Recording into an empty track W hether your project is new or already contains tracks you may record into an empty track A syou record Vegas Pro will create the event s waveform that will display on the track The event like all events in your project will have a source media file By default Vegas Pro stores recorded medi
94. Compression plug in a S Attack ms control Attack ms ni j BIH i 5 W hen the input signal rises above the threshold value the A ttack control determines in milliseconds how quickly the Compression plug in reaches its maximum gain reduction value WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 G E CHP 6 Release ms control Release ma r F mm ay 250 This control determines in milliseconds how quickly the Compression plug in returns to no compression after the signal falls below the threshold T he release time always follows the attack time during compression Auto Gain Compensation control I Auto gain compensation T his toggle control when enabled boosts the output s signal by a constant amount The boost amount is based on the Threshold and Ratio setting This control is useful for preventing an overall level loss when compressing audio H owever even when using the A uto gain compensation control you should use the O utput G ain control to fine tune the output s level Smooth Saturation control I Smooth saturation This toggle control when enabled modifies the compression level in order to lower oumping or breathing distortion that can occur when applying a lot of signal compression WORKING WITH TRACKS 156 Using Noise Gate plug in T he Noise G ate plug in is a good way to eliminate mask subtle noises like tape hiss or low level electric hum from the signal T his plug in has a
95. Cut event selection Selected events are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut eee et oi D E F aiiud AN EE aie Trimming Cropping events Vegas Pro allows you to trim crop events or portions of events from your project Trimming events removes all events outside the time selection from their respective tracks H owever the removed information isnot placed on the clipboard Trimming is different from cutting in that the events within the time selection are preserved To crop events do the following 1 Click on the event to be trimmed if applicable Otherwise skip to Step 2 To trim multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 Select your time range 3 Trim the event s by doing one of the following e Press the ctri T keys e From the Edit menu Choose Trim Crop Undo Event Crossfade Change Chl 2 Delete Delete Paste Repeat Ctrl B Paste Insert Ctrl Shift 4 Split 5 Unda All Clear Edit History GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 R 7 Trim Crop time selection Events outside the time selection are removed from the project H owever the time information is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not Fi placed on the clip
96. Dither plug in contains three noise shaping algorithms T hese algorithms further hide quantization noise by pushing it to a frequency that is less sensitive to human hearing Click the push pin to keep the Track FX dialog the workspace ofl Dither gt Ds SPAAN Mma a Keep Wisible Quantization depth 8 to 32 bit r F m mm 18 bit Dither depth 0 1 2 or 1 bit F m m 1 2bit Noise shape type Off 1 or 2 _ mm Ott Presets The Dither plug in contains one a preset Default all parameters H owever you May save custom presets for use with other tracks To save your own Dither presets do the following 1 Enter a preset name in the drop down list field 2 Set the Dither controls that you want to customize 3 Click the fi button to save the preset SSS a Note You may delete any presets by selecting it from the list and clicking the button SSS WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 SSSsSSSSSsSoseios 159 Quantization depth 8 to 32 bit control Quantization depth 8 to 32 bit F m m 18 bit This control determines the audio s final target bit depth For example if the audio isto be rendered to a wav file and written to a C D you would want to select 16 bit T his setting will optimize the signal s high bit depth that is processed by the Dither plug in Asa result the relatively low bit depth that is used for signal being stored on CD will have better quality output Dither depth 1 2 or 1 bit con
97. ERING PROJECTS CHP 9 mMM 23 7 Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Template 160 CD Transparency Audio 16 AM Radia 20 8 FM Radio Mano 20 8 FM Radio Stereo 56 Dial up High Quality Stereo 64 Hear CD Quality Audio 96 CD Quality Audio le CD lian parenc Audia Saving an asf rendering template You may create your own asf templates by doing the following 1 On the Save A sdialog click the Custom button T he Edit Template dialog will appear Edit Template EA ES Template 16 AM Radio Selected template Template Description Creates an ASF stream or file that has FM radio quality mono audio content Use this setting to encode a single Selected template s bandwidth that supports client connections over modems al description Details Audio Codec Windows Media Audio w Audio Format 16 kbps 16 kHz mono Resample 44 100 Hz E Detailed description of selected templates codec usage resample setting etc Cust Edit Femow e pe ae Click the Custom button N to start the Microsoft Redirector encoding wizard 2 Click the Custom button to start the M icrosoft Encoding wizard Provide a name and description for the new custom template a Template name My ASF Template Description i u Please note that it ended that e ofthe e pre e defined NetShow E mplates pie
98. Equalization FX E ____ Compression FX WloPoaiissses ry yea a Track Noise Gate __ gt lt a WR 17 Track Compressor IY Track EQ ob a WB 6 Track Compressor Track ea RES fume ad Uie O Mla me AEX 72 0 8 attack time 0 to 500 ms E di Ss pf Release time 1 to 5 000 ms fi oo o 4 0 15 20 40 80 160 320 640 12k 26k 5ik 10k 20k M Enabled Frequency Hz j m 144 l Threshold dB ecu eka Low Shel Gain P 88 ANE fint to 0 dB Rolloft d8 oc a E Attack mst 0 86 0 Release m a 250 Bus assignment This button allows you to designate and assign a track to a specific output bus T his option is available for projects being mixed for multiple stereo busses A bus is where various track signals are mixed together and output For more information see Assigning a track to a bus on page 138 Select a bus for playback Ik A T E SA Playback Bus C OPL3 54 Playback CHP 2 QUICK START 38 Arm for Record button T his button allows you to prepare a track for recording You may record directly into tracks A track isready when you see the recording meter appear on It For more information see Setting up to record into tracks on page 141 Mute button T his button enables you to temporarily disable playback of the track so you can focus on another track s event s W hen a track is muted it appears g
99. Home or W Center in View or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view End or E Swap on selection Num pad 5 if no selection Go to beginning of project Ctri Home Move left to marker s Ctrl Left arrow Go to end of project Ctrl End Move right to marker s Ctrl Right arrow Move left by grid marks Page Up Move left to event edit Ctrl Alt Left arrow points including fade edges Move right by grid marks Page Down Move right to event edit Ctrl Alt Right points including fade edges Go to Ctrl G Make time selection Shift Left or Right arrow GENERAL EDITING 66 Editing event and time selections Vegas Pro gives you the flexibility to select one or more events a time range or events and time range A Il selection optionscan apply to a single track or multiple tracks To select an event simply point and click on it Selected Non selected event event e Selecting multiple events By using the key the Shift key or the Selection Edit tool amp you may select individual or multiple events in your project M ultiple events may be selected within a track or acrosstracks Once events are selected you may apply any of the Edit menu commands or editing shortcut keys to them collectively W hichever method you choose you may include or exclude events from a selection area by holding down the key and clicking on an event Using the Ctrl key to select an event The key allows you to select events manually
100. M etc The project file isnot affected overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You may return to the original project to make edits or adjustments and render it again T he following table describes the formats available for rendering your Vegas Pro project Format Name Extension Audio Interchange File Format aif MPEG mpg RealSystem G2 rm Vegas Pro EDL IKE Vegas Pro project veg Video for Windows avi Wave Microsoft wav Windows Media Audio wma Audio Interchange File Format aif Definition The standard audio file format for audio used on Macintosh computers Highly compressed audio format The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file This option creates a text version of event placements in the Track View This text description can then be imported into a database or text application for modification or other purposes This option saves the references to media files used in the project Also saved is project information track plug ins envelopes bus assignments and output properties The veg file does not combine events into a single file The standard video file format used on Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file The standard audio file format used for audio used on Windows based computers The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloa
101. RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 mMM 231 Saving a wma rendering template You may create your own wma templates by doing the following 1 On the Save A sdialog click the Custom button T he Edit Template dialog will appear Template 160 CO Transparence 4 Audio Selected template Template Description Creates CD quality stereo audio ASF content for clients a 3 with high speed Internet and LAN connections Selected template S j description Details fects eon vanes rine es Detailed description of selected pee ede 100 He templates codec usage resample fia setting etc C Ed Remow een Em Famous Click the Custom button ee O O to start the Microsoft Redirector oee ETT me encoding wizard 2 C the Custom button to start the Microsoft Encoding wizard Provide a name and description for the new custom template i Template name My WMA Template Description i Plea e that it is recommended that e of the ae REINAS w templates rather iken Back Cancel Help 3 IN Template Name field enter a name and then type a description optional 4 Click the Next button to set the bandwidth settinos Which network bandwidth would you like to use C Internet 14 4 10 kbps actual C Internet 28 8 22 kbps actual SARSA Intemet 56 Modem 37 kbps actual Selection Single Channel ISDN 50 kbps actual C In ita ea actual IV Resample prior to encode Encoder Resample rate 44 10
102. SONIC FOUNDRY MULTITRACK MEDIA EDITING SYSTEM Serial number for product registration To register on line with Sonic Foundry please follow the steps outlined in the registration wizards upon installation of this product Registering your product will provide you with technical support notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive only to Vegas Pro registered users Registration is required within 7 days of installation or your product will expire Sonic Foundry product registration helps protect against software copyright infringement and allows us to provide support exclusively to registered users If you do not have access to the Internet registration assistance in English is available Monday through Friday 7 00 am 10 00 pm CST e In the North America phone 1 800 577 6642 e From outside North America phone 800 000 76642 e Fax in the US 1 608 256 7300 Fax outside the US 001 608 256 7300 Sonic Foundry Inc 754 Williamson Street Madison WI 53703 Sales Customer Service Only in North America 1 800 57 SONIC Technical Support 608 256 5555 Fax 608 256 7300 Sonic Foundry Europe PO Box 2903 2601 CX Delft Netherlands The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Sonic Foundry T he software described in this manual is provided under the terms of a license agreement or non disclosure agreement The s
103. Sg l offs A gI Enable Al A Move Lett Move Aight To enable the plug in again click its me F Bele al check box or choose Bypass from the shortcut menu Remove Plug In Chooser Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EQ oo ao oo 00 You may bypass all plug ins from the Assignable FX control s shortcut menu USING THE MIXER CHP 7 191 Deleting plug in from the Assignable FX chain To delete a plug in from the chain do the following 1 Click on the A ssignable FX button a The Assignable FX dialog appears 2 3 4 CHP 7 3 o I rls a Reverb Nowe gt On the Assignable FX dialog click the Edit Plug in Chain button a The Plug in Chooser dialog will appear with the chain Delete of Reverb Noise Reduction Graphic EG fo Select the plug in that you want to delete and click the Delete button to remove it from the chain Click the OK button to save the chain and close the Plug in Chooser dialog lt aaaea l Note You may also remove plug ins from the Assignable FX dialog by right clicking the plug in and choosing Remove from the shortcut menu S M Noise Reduction Bypass Move Lett Move Aight Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG USING THE MIXER 1 92 Sp Routing Assignable FX to busses W hen you add A ssignable FX to your project you may assign them to a specific bus for output T he bus will then mix the Assignable FX
104. TH MICH ai bere apd iced aed dae owed Aad eae Aiece ace ance aactwea eae ase 200 Setup with digital multitrack soseo saeni a es 200 Arming the track for recording 00eccc cece eee eeeeees 201 Using the Sound Mapper for stereo or mono recording 000008802 201 Assigning tracks to input devices 2 6 ee ee ees 202 Starting and stopping recording 200 ce ee tees 203 Recording into an empty track u nan saanu es 204 Recording into a time Selection 200 ce eee eee ees 205 Recording into an event a an nuaa nannan eee eee eee 206 Recording into an event with atime selection 0 0055 207 Working with multiple recorded takes 0000e eee eees 208 Previewing taKeS a ain bocce ansteants ou a a cee atahe Re Reena Reset aeates 208 Choosing an active take after loop recording 000 esse eee eee eee 209 Renaming an event take 0 0 c cece ee ee eee eee eee e eens 210 Deleting an event take 2 6 ee ee teen eee eeeaes 211 Specifying where recordings are stored 020000000 213 aa 9 Saving and Rendering projectS 0005 215 SAVING VOU DLO CCE rreren ana na a sh acer Sh ae Wow ecard Relea She 215 Creating a copy of a project using Save AS 0 es 216 RENAE Projects ive prsne ena Genta a a aa sawed 218 Rendering to an audio format a an aaa ae ee eee Saale ea ea eee 219 Rending to a video format 0 00 ccc cece ee nnn
105. TS y i jp SSSSSSS 9 I Using wma controls and templates Vegas Pro allows you to render your project to M icrosoft wma files which can be used for streaming or downloading via the W eb When you render to this format Vegas Pro displays M icrosoft s encoding wizard that carries you through the rendering encoding process A Iso the wma format allows you to set up Redirector settings which will appear on the W indows M edia player Click the Redirector button to display the A SF Redirector Setting File dialog M write Windows Media Format Redirector File LASKA WAX Server path e g mme mediaserver mediatolder mms mediaserver mediafalder M Indicate banner graphic e g http 4 webserver promo gif URAL http webserver promo aif I Click through link e g http webserver default htm r r T r T URL http webserver default htm cancel _ Enter path to multimedia server Enter path to graphic banner that will display on the Windows Media player Enter the URL to which the user would link if the graphic banner is clicked Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Template 160 CD Transparency Audio 16 AM Radia 20 8 FM Radio Wono 20 8 FM Radio Stereo B Dial up High Quality Stereo 64 Hear CD Quality Audio 96 CD Quality Audio 128 CD Transparency Audio SAVING AND
106. Tree View pane You may add folders that contain media files to this folder T he Favorites folder allows you to quickly access frequently used media files and place them in your project To add folders to Vegas Pro Favorites do the following 1 Select a folder in the Tree View or Contents List pane To select multiple folders hold down either the or keys 2 Click the A dd to Favorites f j button Or you may right click on the selected folder to display a shortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Add to Favorites Add to My Favorites Fa My Favorites Delete Exe hy Computer Rename eo My Documents H E Network Neighborhood E MESE aa Sounds M8 Tutorial T he folder will appear under the Favorites folder in the Tree View pane Using the Explorer window Transport bar T he Explorer window contains a transport bar that allows you to listen to media audio files before you place them into your project W hen you play back a media file you may monitor its volume level on the preview bus that is located in the Mixer window For more information see Using the Mixer on page 169 Play Stop Auto Preview Previewing a media file You may preview one file at a time from the Contents List pane of the Explorer window by doing the following 1 Select the media file that you want to preview 2 Click Play button T he media file s levels may be monitored on the preview bus 3 Press the Stop
107. Up arrow Zoom out time incremental Down arrow Zoom out vertically Shift Down arrow Miscellaneous commands T hese commands allow you to access help related items and refresh the screen Description Keys Description Keys Online help Fi Popup menu Shift F1 0 What s This help Shift F 1 Refresh screen F5 INTRODUCTION 28 Signal Flow Audio event Normalize event Event ASR a ve Mute T FRN Open in Sound Forge ChE Normalize Auxiliary send Track FX Assignable FX send lt lt e gt TNE By Fs 1 46 dB T O 1 Pre Post vol Pre Post vol 1 Fan Center Fs 1 Inf iha i Aas ee M PM 33d m Aue B Inf a TEE gt To i Fre Volume d Pre Volume Past Volume a Post Volume Assignable FX Track fader y vot oog CO Pan track Fan Center Mute track Bus Assign A e Bus OPL3 5A Playback Bus B OPL3 5A Playback Bus 4 OPL3 SA Playback e Gus E OPLS 54 Playback Bus Control Mu __ Hardware fus FR A ie output Master Fader INTRODUCTION CHP 1 29 Quick Start i M NT e a a O TheVegas Pro environment isa new way of thinkingin multitrack mixing W hether you are experienced at mixing or brand new to it you will find Vegas Pro easy to use and powerful As you use Vegas Pro experiment with different features and listen to the results in real time om a P 4 a 2 L i f F F bh Ee
108. Vegas Pro isatrue multitrack mixing environment Tracks are the containers for audio events which you place and arrange A track can contain different events There isnot a limit to the number of tracks you use in Vegas Pro Because tracks are containers for events you may use track functions to affect all the events on them Vegas Pro provides track functions that allow you organize your project and apply track features that enable you to achieve your project s goals T his chapter explains track editing techniques and features that you can apply to your project s tracks Track basics W hether you are starting your first project or opening an existing one you will need to manage the tracks in your project T he following procedures explain basic track management T he terms used to describe the track parts are explained in the Quick Start chapter of the manual For more information see Track navigation on page 36 Adding an empty track Typically when you add an event to your project by double clicking it from the Explorer window Vegas Pro automatically creates a new track and places the event on it You can add empty eventless tracks to a project T hese tracks can be used to directly record into or serve as placeholders for specific audio that you will add later For example your project may contain special audio but it needs to be recorded and mixed or retrieved from another location To add an empty track do the fol
109. a files in the Vegas Pro program folders H owever you may specify where recorded media files are stored For more information see Specifying where recordings are stored on page 213 On the Track View the cursor position is where recording will begin You may want to place the cursor along the timeline before you record Positioning the cursor is not always necessary since you may move the event after recording To record into an empty track do the following 1 Press the ctri Q keys to insert an empty track Or from the Insert menu choose Audio Track 2 Place the cursor on the timeline where you want to begin recording 3 Select the track that you want to record into G i amp amp i lt _ Note To select multiple tracks click them while holding down either the key to select adjacent tracks or the key to select random tracks LR Arm the selected track s by clicking the Arm for Record button on the track s Choose the input device from which the track will record pg 202 Choose the recording method that the track will use pg 202 N O A Start recording by clicking the Record button on the Transport bar recording RECORDING CHP 8 R 205 Recording into a time selection By making a time selection you specify where along the timeline to record A Iso the time selection determines how long Vegas Pro will record Any selected events that occur
110. able FX control the other controls will be grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of their respective meters You may solo more than oneA ssignable FX control at a time To solo an Assignable FX control simply click the Solo 7 button on either the control or the dialog Click it again to restore all A ssignable FX for playback 00 00 0 0 00 00 00 Soloed Assignable FX Naming or renaming an Assignable FX Every A ssignable FX control that appears in the M ixer window has a Scribble Strip where you can type a name You may name or rename the A ssignable FX at any time by doing the following 1 Double click in the Scribble Strip and type the a A ssignable FX name Double click and type the name If the control already has been 0 0 0 0 Moise Reduction named you will see the previously Scribble Strip entered name 2 Press the key to save the A ssignable FX s name CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 1 96 Working with preset plug in chains You may save and edit the plug in chains that you added to busses or created as A ssignable FX controls T hese chains will be stored by Vegas Pro for use in future projects If you use the same plug in chains saving them as presets is faster way to apply them to busses or creating A ssignable FX controls T he plug in chains may be save as presets from existing chains that are being used in a project or as you are creati
111. able describes the formats available for rendering your Vegas Pro project Format Name Extension Definition Audio Interchange File Format aif The standard audio file format used on Macintosh computers MPEG Layer 3 Mp3 Highly compressed audio format You may render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in see note below this table RealMedia G2 Sell The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Vegas Pro EDL PX This option creates a text version of event placements in the Track View This text description can then be imported into a database or text application for modification or other purposes Vegas Pro project veg This option saves the references to media files used in the project Also saved is project information track plug ins envelopes bus assignments and output properties The veg file does not combine events into a single file Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file Wave Microsoft wav The standard audio file format used on Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Format asf The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web ET _____e_____ Note Vegas Pro allows you to render
112. ace CHP 8 RECORDING 21 4 gt p 3 Click the Browse button T he Recorded Files Folder dialog will appear Recorded Files Folder E E Save iri E Sonic Foundry Vegas ci Ell B hy Computer oy 3H Floppy A aa Nt4 C Program Files s Storage E Folder C Program Files Sonic Foundry Vegas Cancel Free space 599 3 Megabytes 4 N avigate to the hard drive or folder where you want Vegas Pro to write and store recorded media source files 5 Click the Save button to set the destination drive or folder Click the Cancel button leave the current destination the same 6 Repeat steps 1 4 to change the destination again n Note Check Start all new projects with these settings if you want new projects to store recorded media source files to the same location Otherwise Vegas Pro will use its default settings W Start all new projects with these settings RECORDING CHP 8 215 2g Saving and Q Rendering ee al Vegas Pro allows you to save and render projects into many different formats The chosen format is determined by how you want to deliver the media W hen you render a Vegas Pro project to a different format your project is not affected It may be opened again in Vegas Pro for editing This chapter explains saving a project and using the Save A s function In addition you will find reference information for the r
113. ack FX dialog to close it and save the new chain order CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 146 Arranging plug ins from the Plug in Chooser To arrange the plug in order from the Plug in Chooser dialog do the following 1 Click on the Track FX button The Track FX dialog appears Untitled iy gt Edit Plugin Chain ee ae Shelf Gain 4B ea Rolloff d8 oct A gai 2 On the Track FX dialog click the Edit Plug in Chain button a The Plug in Chooser dialog will appear with the plug in chain T here are two ways to arrange plug insin your chain Drag and drop the plug in to a new location in the chain e Select the plug in and click either the left or right f l move button my i hitt Plug In Right l amp Track EQ Track Note Gate Track Compressor 2 j E amp Track EQ H Track Compressor Track Noise Gate k me i hitt Plug In Left 3 Once you arrange the plug insin the order that you want click the OK button to keep your changes and close the Plug in Chooser dialog Bypassing plug ins on the chain You may bypass plug ins on the chain by clicking the check box on a specific plug in or right clicking the plug in to display a shortcut menu and choosing Bypass T he plug in will remain bypassed until you enable it again Bypassing a plug in prevents its processing on the track a Track EQ E Track EQ Effect enabled Effect bypassed
114. am on page 90 T here are different ways to open the sound editor from the Trimmer when it is active e Click the k button Right click the media file and choose Open in Sound Editor from the shortcut menu e Press the shortcut keys EE E i i 00 00 00 00 00 05 Open in Sound Forge Ctri E 20 00 10 00 00 15 A et ae SS a Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E Copy Ctrl C 0 Save Markers Regions Marker hl EE Ha Region R 0 00 03 788 00 00 08 691 00 00 04 903 Zoom Selection Ctrl Up Using the Edit details window T he Edit Details window provides an alternate means for working with audio events Command markers M arkers and Regions after they are placed in your project The following table displays what edit functions can be performed from the Edit Details window and references to more detailed instructions for each edit Event editing Markers Regions Commands Moving along time line Moving along time Moving along time Moving along time line pg 87 pg 34 line pg 80 line pg 83 Changing Active take name Adding a name Adding a name Selecting a command type pg 88 pg 104 pg 81 pg 84 Using Switches pg 107 Setting the parameters pg 88 Setting Snap offset pg 93 Adding reference comments pg 88 In addition to editing you may access information about the project namely seeing media file reference paths The Edit Detail window may be docked in th
115. ame rate is 15 frames per second Measures amp Beats This option displays the Time Ruler in musical Measures amp Beats based on the ruler properties SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 29 97 frames per second with dropped frames SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 29 97 frames per second SMPTE Non Drop 30 fps This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 30 frames per second SMPTE EBU 25 fps This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 25 frames per second SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 24 frames per second Feet and Frames 16mm 40 fpf This option displays the Time Ruler in 16mm feet with 40 frames per foot Feet and Frames 35mm 16 fpf This option displays the Time Ruler in 35mm feet with 16 frames per foot CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 25 Using Edit Ruler Offset You may set the ruler s time offset at the cursor s timeline position by doing the following 1 Position the cursor to the desired location along the timeline 2 On the ruler right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Edit Ruler Offset Anna Samples a Time Seconds 4 arching atime eval usin
116. an external device MIDI Time Code MITC MTC isan addendum to the MIDI 1 0 Specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications Basically it isa MIDI representation of SM PTE time code Mix A function Vegas Pro performs inherently by adding events to multiple audio tracks Multiple Stereo A Mixer configuration that allows you to assign individual tracks to any number of stereo output busses In single stereo mode all tracks go out the same stereo bus M ultiple stereo configuration allows you to keep your signals from the Tracks discrete if you want them to be Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can be controlled via MIDI Vegas Pro utilizes M IDI for synchronization purposes Noise shaping N oise shaping is a technique which can minimize the audibility of quantization noise by shifting its frequency spectrum For example in 44 100 Hz audio quantization noise is shifted towards the N yquist Frequency of 22 050 Hz Non Destructive Editing This type of editing involves a pointer based system of keeping track of edits W hen you delete a section of audio in a non destructive system the audio on disk is not actually deleted Instead a set of pointers is established to tell the program to skip the deleted sect
117. and click the Delete button HK CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 243 g Customizing f Vegas Pro w J m Ua Na o E Vegas Pro may be customized to your project needs and working preferences You may change these settings at any time You have complete control over your project If you use the same settings for all of your projects you may set V egas Pro to use them as your default settings M any of the settings depend on your equipment or studio setup Vegas Pro can be set to work with the components that you prefer In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize the appearance of Vegas Pro set a project s properties and set the application s preferences Dockable Vegas Pro windows Vegas Pro has six dockable tool windows that you may use while working on a project T hese windows may be accessed via the View menu or their shortcut Keys Window Shortcut keys Description Explorer The Explorer window is similar to the Windows 9x and NT file management Explorer included with your operating system Use the Vegas Pro Explorer window for selecting media files to place in your project pg 245 Trimmer The Trimmer window is a good place to edit an audio event When an event is placed in the Trimmer window you may take portions of the event and place them on separate tracks by dragging and dropping pg 120 Mixer The Mixer window gi
118. and may actually cause unexpected behavior in other devices Check your hardware documentation to find out if it supports full frame messages MIDI Clock Output This tab contains controls for MIDI Clock output It is only displayed if a device is selected for MIDI Clock output on the Sync tab MTC Input MTC Output MIDI Clock Output I Send Start instead of Continue when beginning playback M Use internal timer for MIDI Clock generation Always send MIDI Clock Song Position Pointer generation Never On start and stop of playback and record For all cursor postion changes Carcel de The following list describes how to work with the MIDI Clock Output tab e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the A dvanced Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the A dvanced Preferences dialog and return to the Sync tab e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and return to the Sync tab M Send Start instead of Continue when beginning playback SSS E T a E W hen Sent Start instead of Continue when beginning playback option is checked Vegas Pro will send a Start command rather than a Continue command when Generate MIDI Clock is enabled on the Sync tab Normally Vegas Pro will send a Continue command to allow the chasing device to start at a specific time H owever some older M IDI sequencers do not support the Continue comman
119. and will occur Otherwise command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position Once the command properties are set click the OK button to place the command marker on the Command Ruler CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 88y Moving a command marker To move a command marker do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker you want to move The pointer will appear as a hand h 2 Click and drag the command marker to the new position along the timeline 3 Release the mouse to set the command marker 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to move the command marker again Editing a command marker You may change the command markers properties at any time by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker you want to edit T he pointer will appear as a hand h 2 Right click the marker to display a shortcut menu Goto A G Rename Delete 3 From the shortcut menu choose Edit T he Command Properties dialog will appear 4 Change the command type retype parameters or comments or enter a new position along the timeline 5 Click the OK button to assign the new properties to the command marker Or click the Cancel button to keep the command marker s original properties GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 ee G 1 Naming a command marker The name you give to a command marker will appear in the Comments field on the Command Properties dialog You may name each command marker in your project
120. ap T o G rid Ctrl F Y Show logo splash screen on startup 9 IY Showa Tip of the Day on startup ka Snap To Markers Shift F ow active take name in events vi s ii ts 4 averorms in even T1444 EBrEowvzrg Zz FBags 2a M Recently used project list 6 g Choose Language l English X Default All GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 91 2 On the Preferences dialog choose the Audio tab Preferences H ES General Routing Audio Syne Playback buffering seconds C Fe ir Normalize peak level dB o dE Location of prefered audio editor E Program Files Sound Forge forges EXE Browse Advanced Default All Removable Disk F 2 G Files of type Executable Files 228 Cancel Recent 4 From this dialog navigate to the application to use for editing audio events 5 Select the application s executable icon exe and click the dialog s Open button to set the application as your sound editor The application s path will be displayed in the Location of preferred audio editor field Location of prefered audio editor C Program Files S ound Forge forges2 EE CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING Q2 jp Opening the sound editor from Vegas Pro A Il eventsin your Vegas Pro project are actually references to media files on a storage device hard drive W hen you edit an event in a sound editor you are editing the media file to which the event is referenced A n
121. arries both those plug in setting to the next plug in etc Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange the plug ins chain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next one in the chain There isno right or wrong way to order plug ins Although some plug ins work better when they follow another For example the Dither plug in is best suited as the last one in a chain H owever the chain s plug in order is strictly based on your preferences and desired output You may arrange the chain s plug ins from either the Bus FX or the Plug in Chooser dialogs Arranging plug ins on the Bus FX dialog 1 Click the Bus FX button 2 The Bus FX dialog appears 2 Right click on the plug in that you want to move to display a shortcut menu Noise Reduction Bypass Move Aight x Remove Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EO 3 From the shortcut menu choose Move Right or Move Left 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to continue arranging plug ins CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 184 Arranging plug ins on the Plug in Chooser dialog To arrange the chain s plug in order do the following 1 Click the Bus FX button The BusFX dialog appears dit Plug In Chain Cf oie Reduction Hr Reverb 4 2 On the Bus FX dialog click the Bus FX Edit button 2 to display the Plug in C hooser dialog T here are two ways to arrange plug insin your chain on the Plug in Choo
122. bar a Note You may also double click on the button to remove it a 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to remove more buttons from the Toolbar 5 Click the Close button to save the Toolbar settings and exit the C ustomize Toolbar dialog CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 261 Using the Time Display window TheTime Display window reflects the cursor s position on the time line and the end point of a time selection You may change the Time Display window s time settings including what time the window displays and color usage The Time Display window may be moved from its docked position above the Track List to float on the Vegas Pro workspace In addition the Time Display window may be docked in the Windows Docking A rea For more information see Docking a window on page 244 Changing the Time Display window s settings The Time Display window always reflects the ruler settings that are selected You may change the ruler settings via the Time Display window or vice versa For more information see Changing the Ruler settings on page 253 To change the time settings do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the Time Display window 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu Samples Time Seconds Absolute Frames Measures amp Beats SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps SMPTE Drop 29 97 tpz SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Film Syne 24 fos Feet and Frames 16mm 40 tpt Feet and Frames 35mm
123. ber 15 Shift key selecting 66 Shortcut keys See Keyboard commands Signal flow 28 INDEX viii Snap offset 93 Snapping events 93 95 disabling 95 snap offset 93 to grid lines 94 to marker lines 95 Solo button 38 Soloinga bus 180 Soloing a track 137 Soloing an Assignable FX 195 Sound editor program 90 92 opening from Trimmer 124 opening from Vegas Pro 92 setting up 90 Splitting 96 98 event and time selection 98 event selection 97 time selection 97 without selection 97 Splitting events 55 Starting Vegas Pro 14 Streaming media commands 86 for RealPlayer 86 for W indowsM edia 86 Switches 107 112 locking an event 109 looping an event 110 muting an event 108 normalizing an event 111 Sync preferences 275 advanced control settings 276 Synchronizing audio with video 53 56 System requirements 12 common 12 minimum 12 recommended 12 INDEX Target media player previewing on 44 Technical support 12 email 12 fax 13 telephone number 13 web site 12 Technical support Title page Telephone registration 16 Time display window 261 changing color usage 262 changing time format 261 MIDI Time Code settings 263 Time selection 67 copying 69 cutting 73 deleting 76 editing 55 trim crop 75 with events 68 Time selection recording into 205 Timeline moving events along 34 41 Tip of the day help using 18 Toolbar 20 adding buttonst
124. better the quality but the larger the file size Sample rate 44 100 Bit depth T he bit depth affects the audio s quality like the sample rate T he higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Bit depth Channels You may render your project to channel types Stereo M ono Multiple M ono and Multiple Stereo fist T i T HE Multiple Mora Multiple Stereo Channel Description Stereo Renders all the project s busses to a stereo file The signal is saved to the respective right and left channels that you specified in the project This may cause clipping in the rendered stereo file You can compensate for the clipping by reducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Mono Renders the project so that both the right and left channels are summed to one mono signal This may cause clipping in the mono file You can compensate for clipping by reducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Multiple Mono Renders each of the project s busses into two mono files one left and one right For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 4 mono files two right and two left This feature is useful if you are using applications that do not work with stereo files Therefore if you wanted to export tracks from Vegas Pro into one of these applications you would need to export each channel as a mono file Multiple Stereo Renders each of
125. bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store Clipboard T he clipboard is where data that you have cut or copied in Vegas Pro isstored You can then paste the data back into Vegas Pro at a different location or paste it into other applications such as M icrosoft W ord or another instance of Vegas Pro Some data such as audio cannot be pasted into applications such as M icrosoft W ord or N otepad but the text data from the Edit Details window can be pasted T his allows you to then print or format the data Clipping Clipping is what occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort CODEC An acronym for C oder D ecoder that is commonly used when working with data compression Crossfade Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in Cutoff frequency T he cutoff frequency of a filter isthe frequency at which the filter changes its response For example in a low pass filter frequencies greater than the cutoff frequency are attenuated while frequencies less than the cutoff frequency are not affected DC Offset DC Offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal T his current causes the audio signal to alternate around a point above or below the normal infinity dB center line in the
126. board Trim Crop time and event selection Only selected events outside the time selection are removed from the project N on selected events remain T he time information is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not PETTE L mama Pieced on the clipboard P Deleting events Vegas Pro allows you to delete events or portions of events from your project Deleting events removes all events within the time selection from their respective tracks H owever the removed information is not placed on the clipboard To delete events do the following 1 Click on the event to be deleted To delete multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 Select your time range if applicable O therwise skip to step 3 Edi Undo Size Event s Ctrl 2 3 Delete the event s by doing one of the following e Press the key From the Edit menu choose Delete Delete Delete Undo All Clear Edit History CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING y Delete time selection Events within the time selection are removed from the project H owever the time information within the selection is not removed Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not placed on the clipboard Delete time and event selection O nly selected events within the
127. busses are usually used to separate signals from the rest of the project For example if a musician in a studio only wants to listen to the guitar portion of the project you can set up an auxiliary bus for that purpose T hen the musician can play his or her part while only listening to the guitar A n auxiliary bus do not affect the project s overall playback A sshown in the previous section the primary bus is set using the Bus amp button on a track s toolbar Setting up the auxiliary bus works differently To set up and auxiliary bus do the following 1 If you do not see the multipurpose slider expand the track to display it WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 139 2 Click on the multipurpose label to display a drop down list Paha Make sure the auxiliary bus is Multipurpose Pan Center different from the track bus label _ Fan Center Aus Inf Aux B Inf 3 From the drop down list choose the auxiliary bus output a gt Note If you only have one stereo bus in your project the drop down list will not appear For more information see Using the Audio properties tab on page 265 E fT Adjusting the auxiliary bus volume W hen you select an auxiliary bus you will need to adjust its playback volume with the fader A uxiliary tracks volume are preset to inf dB mute for playback ouble click the slider to set its volume at 0 0 dB CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 140 j ______
128. by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker you want to name or rename T he pointer will appear as a hand 4 Paar eee ae ee 7 re Z qm www sonictoundry com f Edit Goto 00 00 20 aaa a Delete 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box will appear next to the command marker Link to Sonic Foundry s website 00 00 20 Sz 4 Type the command marker s name 5 Press the key or click anywhere in the Track View to set the marker s name Navigating to a command marker You may have scrolled to a portion of the project and do not see the cursor any more You may click in the Track View to move and view the cursor press the ctri lt or gt shortcut keys to move the cursor or use command markers to bring the cursor Into view To navigate using command markers do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker that you want to position the cursor The pointer will appear as a hand dm Edit ndry com gt URL www sonichoundry com ATL www sonictoundry com 00 00 20 Rename 00 00 20 zr ai ee tae Fh a Delete 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Go to T he cursor s yellow tags will appear below the marker tag CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 0 Deleting a command marker You may remove a command marker from your project by doing the following
129. choose the setting and compression values that you want the template to use 4 Click the i button to save the template You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list making your setting changes and clicking the button P_ Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the X button eK Using asf controls and templates Vegas Pro allows you to render your project to M icrosoft asf files which can be used for streaming via the Web When you render to this format Vegas Pro displays M icrosoft s encoding wizard that carries you through the rendering encoding process A Iso the asf format allows you to set up Redirector settings which will appear on the W indows M edia player Click the Redirector button to display the A SF Redirector Setting File dialog IY Write Windows Media Format Redirector File LASKA WAX Server path e g mme mediaserver mediatolder mms mediaserver mediafalder M Indicate banner graphic e g http webserver promo gif URL http webserver promo aif I Click through link e g http webserver default htm r r O r T URL http webserver default htm cancel _ Enter path to multimedia server Enter path to graphic banner that will display on the Windows Media player Enter the URL to which the user would link if the graphic banner is clicked SAVING AND REND
130. ck Empi Event Envelope Line 3 On the music bed place the mouse pointer slightly ahead of the voice over s starting point The mouse pointer appears as a hand ih 4 Right click and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu A square point appears on the envelope line w Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade 5 Repeat step 4 to add three more points on the line You want a total of four points TUTORIAL CHP 3 59 Setting the volume envelope N ow we will use the points on the envelope to lower and raise the volume so that the music bed does not interfere with the voice over W hen you click or hover over a point information about it appears 1 Click and drag the points so that they are positioned with two near the start of the voice over and two at the end You can only set one point at a time or use the Envelope tool to select and move multiple points at a time ee Volume at 00 00 08 852 is 0 0 dB Volume at 00 00 08 352 6 7 0 dB 3 Set the outer points so that their volume level is at 0 0 dB 4 Press either gt or i to play the project and check the timing of the volume envelope 5 A djust the outer and inner points along the timeline as needed N ext we will add some equalization EQ to the voice over CHP 3 TUTORIAL 60 Adding equalization EQ to the voice over T he voice over has a strong bass quality to it We will adjust that quality slightly with EQ on the first ban
131. ck the Edit Plug in Chain button The Plug in Chooser dialog will appear with the plug in chain 3 Select the plug in that you want to remove and click the Delete button to remove it from the chain 4 Click the OK button to save the chain and close the Plug in Chooser dialog CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 148 Saving plug in chains as presets Vegas Pro allows you to save plug in chains as presets so that you may use them again on other tracks with other projects If you use a combination of plug ins often saving them as a preset chain will save you time when editing a project T he preset chains that you save retain their order and settings that you have applied You may save plug in chains as presets from existing chains on tracks or when you are creating a plug in chain T he plug in chains that you save as presets will appear in the Plug in Chooser dialog in the Fx Chains folder 2 Fs Chains tJ P MusicPreset Preset plug in chains that you have created and saved A preset chain may be applied to a track the same way you assign a plug in to a track To save a plug in chain asa preset do the following 1 Access the Plug in C hooser dialog if it is not already displaying If you want to save aan existing chain already assigned to a track click on the Track FX button 2 and then on the Edit Plug in Chain button 2 2 Once the Plug in Chooser dialog is displaying create a new plug in chain or simply use
132. control s plug ins along with any tracks that may be route to the same bus To route an A ssignable FX to a bus do the following 1 Click Bus button amp on the A ssignable FX A sub menu will appear and display all the busses that are in your project 00 0 0 2 Click the bus to which you want the A ssignable FX control to be routed The Assignable FX control will display the bus s letter to which it is routed Working with Assignable FX controls Assignable FX controls that appear in the M ixer window are fully independent and may be adjusted separately from the others You may adjust each A ssignable FX s volume meter resolution and clipping controls Solo Bus assignment Fx 1 _ s of Mute A lt Assignable FX Input Master Fader z oo 00 00 00 oo 00 00 00 o p 00 0 0 0 0 Scribble Strip i Mixer Fader USING THE MIXER CHP 7 193 Adjusting the Assignable FX faders You may adjust a A ssignable FX s faders during project playback T he faders on the incoming and outgoing signal meters are split so that you can adjust the two stereo channels levels To adjust the faders do the following 1 On either set of faders click and drag in the middle of the fader to adjust both channels at the same time Or click the left or right fader to adjust either stereo channel 2 Release the mouse to set the desired level Adjust the fader Adjust each stereo channels fader separately
133. ct the FX Chains folder and view those presets For more information see Working with preset plug in chains on page 196 Click and drag plug ins to the desired bus PER Je alje E gt Plug Ins Pa Sonic Foundry Graphic Dynamic rae Esin Fe Bi Audio hk Sonic Foundry Graphic EG We Sonic Fi ay FX AY Sonic Foundry Multiband Dynamics WS Sonic F i Fes Chains Aa Sonic Foundry Multi Tap Delay HS Sonic F HL Track ty Sonic Foundry Noe Gate HS Sonic F k Sonic Foundry Noise Reduction HS Sonic F ty Sonic Foundry Paragraphic EG HS Sonic Fi ktt Sonic Foundry Reverb 4 3 Click and drag the plug ins to the bus to which you want to apply the chain nn a Note You may add multiple plug ins at the same time by clicking them while pressing the or keys and then drag them to the desired bus _ _ _ X _ _ _ _ USING THE MIXER CHP 7 183 4 Confirm that the plug ins where added by clicking the Bus FX button a to view the Bus FX dialog You may begin using the plug in controls or rearranging the chain s order E 7 Noise Reduction Hiv Reverb 4 gt a Al Added bus plug ins ey Arranging bus plug ins on the chain The plug in controls that you set are cumulative during playback For example when a signal passes through N oise Reduction it carries the R eduction s settings as it passes through Reverb then the signal c
134. d 1 Click the button on the voice over s track The Track FX dialog appears 160 320 06 BAD 12k 26k 51k M Enabled Frequency Hz awl 160 Low Shelf Gain dB Sc ri Rolloff Boot s wal You can set the EQ settings by typing in the appropriate field dragging the slider or clicking the arrow buttons between the slider and the setting field 2 Set the Frequency to 160 Hz 3 Set the Gain to inf 4 Set the Rolloff to 12 dB oct 5 Close the Track FX dialog by clicking anywhere outside it 6 Press either or i to play the project with the new EQ settings N ext we will save the project as a V egas project file TUTORIAL CHP 3 C1 Saving a Vegas project veg A Vegas project file contains all of the information about a single project H owever it does not contain any media but maintains the references to media files used in the project 1 Select one of the following to save the Vegas Pro project e From the File menu choose Save e Click on the g e Press ctrij S on the keyboard The first time you save a project the Save A s dialog appears Save As Ei EI Save in Big Storage E ce Vegas Projects File name Untitled Save as hype Vegas Project veg x Cancel l Copy all media with project 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to store the project 3 Type the project name M yTutorial in the File Name fie
135. d and must start from the beginning every time CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 280 M Use internal timer for MIDI Clock generation W hen the Use internal timer for MIDI Code generation option is checked the MIDI Clock that Vegas Pro generates will be based on your computer s C entral Processing U nit CPU clock Otherwise Vegas Pro generate M IDI Code based on the sound card s clock W Always send MIDI Clock W hen the Always send MIDI clock option is checked Vegas Pro will send MIDI Clock information when Generate MIDI Clock is enabled on the Sync tab Some applications and devices listen for MIDI Clock information even when the master application is not playing This listening allows the applications and devices to synchronize faster H owever some applications and devices may not support this Vegas Pro feature If your MIDI Clock slave device does not support this feature we recommend that you disable this feature s control Song Position Pointer generation Never On start and stop of playback and record i For all cursor postion changes Song Position Pointer generation T he Song Position Pointer generation radio button list specifies when Vegas Pro will send Song Position Pointer Messages when Generate MIDI Clock is enabled on the Sync tab Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to seek to a proper location prior to starting the synchronization proce
136. d that you exit all open programs and temporarily disable any virus protection 1 Insert the Vegas Pro CD ROM The Vegas Pro Installation screen appears if CD ROM A utoPlay is enabled Ifthe CD ROM A utoPlay is disabled click on the button and choose Run gal Run BF Shut Down In the Run window that appears type the CD ROM drive s letter and add setup exe Click the OK button to start the installation 2 Click Install Software The installation process begins 3 Follow the screen prompts and enter the necessary information when required e Usethe button to continue the installation e Usethe button to suspend the installation and review previous screen prompts e Usethe button to terminate the installation process 4 At the last screen prompt click the button to conclude the installation CHP 1 INTRODUCTION ee Starting Vegas Pro Starting Vegas Pro is exactly the same as starting most Windows programs that you may use already After Vegas Pro has been installed on your computer there are two ways to start the program Using the shortcut You may have noticed a new icon on your desktop eg upon completion of the installation procedure This icon is a shortcut to the Vegas Pro program located on your hard drive By double clicking on this icon you will start Vegas Pro directly from the desktop Using the Start button The second method to start also allows you to start Vegas Pro right from the deskt
137. d to get back to later Regions can function as permanent time selections Command markers indicate when an instruction function will occur in a streaming media files T hese markers can be used to display headlines captions link to web sites or any other function you define In addition these markers can be used to embed Scott Studios data information which is used extensively in broadcasting Working with markers M arkers are useful for identifying and navigating to specific pointsin longer projects A s you place markers in your project Vegas Pro automatically numbers them in the order that they were placed You may name them and move them along the project s timeline Placing and moving a marker M arkers are placed at the cursor s position via the Insert menu right clicking on the M arker bar or pressing the Mj key You may place a marker by positioning the cursor or on the fly while your project is playing back M arkers appear as red tags above the ruler Marker bar 20 00 06 ___ Marker Assignable Fx Remove Assignable Fx Audio Envelopes Right click on Marker bar To movea marker do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker you want to move T he pointer will appear as a hand d 2 Click and drag the marker to the new position along the timeline GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 81 C gt m k fr oaod Wl i Lil dd Lal ahha alal ai alial akta daal MET el
138. d tracks will be removed CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1 Adding a panning envelope A panning envelope allows you to control how a track s events are mixed to either the right or left soeaker You may add panning envelopes to tracks which can be assigned to an auxiliary bus and A ssignable FX send A panning envelope can be added to one or multiple tracks at the same time A panning envelope line appears in red To add a panning envelope do the following 1 Select the track s that you want to add the panning envelope 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes and then choose Pan Or press the P key A red line appears across the track s Assignable Fx Remove Assignable Fe Aus A Audio Envelopes Volume yf Aus B Audio Track Ctri O Adding pan envelope points Once a pan envelope is placed you may add points to it These points will be used to move the envelope line so that the panning effect will be automated To add envelope points do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the envelope line The mouse pointer appears as a hand 4m 2 Right click and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu A square point appears on the envelope line Or simply double click to add a envelope point 7 Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade 3 Repeat step 2 asto add more points on the envelope Set to 100 Left Add Point Set to Center 3 Note If you add too many points
139. ded with your operating system U se the Vegas Pro Explorer window to select media files to place into your projects Select drive Ey Ja Ale x fale o iel E or folder pi E71 Desktop Drums Ld E My E t l d 5 N amp z DN Preview selected Pod media file before s E Organ you place it 5i t e i a ea cane i in the project j a download ayer Select media to place Ley Video in the project by dragging ee Other x and dropping or double clicking Explorer Trimmer p CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 0 Video Preview window T his window displays a project s video event during project editing and playback If a video event isnot a placed in the project you will see N o Video in the center of this window 2574193 3204240 15 000 tps Right click to Video will appear during project playback or as the cursor is moved during editing change Video Preview settings Default Background Black Background White Background Integral Stretch Preserve Aspect Stretch to Window Trimmer window T he Trimmer window isa good place to edit an audio event W hen an event is placed in the Trimmer window you may take portions of the event and place them on separate tracks by dragging and dropping For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 120 F E MediaMusic LeadGuitar way E 5 Trimmer window Transport bar Mixer window T he Mixer window gives you access to your pr
140. ding via the Web The standard audio file format for audio used on Macintosh computers T here are more detailed instructions for rending to a specific format later in this manual For more information see Saving and Rendering projects on page 215 CHP 2 QUICK START By SS QUICK START CHP 2 49 CHAPTER ame Tutorial e 3 sy gt aw M p Par mo lt SS W elcome to the Vegas Pro tutorial It is designed to familiarize you with the basic features and tools of Vegas Pro while creating a project The following sections are primarily step oriented and less descriptive although descriptions are given If you would like to learn more about a particular topic in the tutorial accessthe online help For more information see Accessing help on page 17 Thistutorial will teach you how to place media filesin the project edit them and save them together into a video file W e provide you with the files you need to create this sample project We will take a video that has poor audio quality and replace its audio with a voice over recorded in a studio T he new audio will need to be synchronized with the video T he voice over will also require some editing and equalization In addition the video has theme music that we are going to replace with a new music bed The video length is approximately 15 seconds A s you work you will see how easy it is to master the powerful features that Vegas Pro has to offer If you ma
141. dio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio In the latter case the rate of 30 non drop is typically used In the former case 30 drop is usually used lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 290 p SSS Frame Rate Video T he speed at which individual images in the video are displayed on the screen A faster frame rate results in smoother motion in the video H owever more times than not frame rate is associated with SM PT E standard frame rates for video 29 97 25 or 24 for film Frequency Spectrum T he Frequency Spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the frequency range is basically 20 Hzto 20 000 Hz T he frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum Hertz Hz T he unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS Insertion Point The Insertion Point also referred to asthe Cursor Position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where pasted data is placed or other data is inserted depending on the operation The Insertion Point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button any where in the waveform display of a data window Markers Saved locationsin the sound file M arkers are stored in the Regions List and can be used for quick navi
142. dit NIStONY 2408 08 ea eee ie E be ak VG Rae eed 79 Using project markers and reGiONS 00 e eee eee es 80 Working with markerS s a a s sa ee ees aa aan acetal ee oe wate See ews 80 VVOFKING WIH TEGIONS niaaa r r Pa ees Be ae ee ee 83 Working with command markers 0 0 0 0 cee cece cece e ee eee eee eeeeaaes 86 Qe 5 Using a sound editor program 22000 cece eee eee eee ees 90 Setting up the sound editor program 0 000 eee eee eee eee 90 Opening the sound editor from Vegas Pro 2 ce es 92 Advanced Audio Editing asnasan anana n annnars 93 SNADNO CVEMS o nacc 6a enia aa a a a a ea ae eee 93 Using the event snap offset nnna naa nananana 93 Snapping to grid liN S 0 ce eee 94 SNAPPING to marke S oii es vee sae sees ieee ees Ove ois ee EEEE TENA 95 Disable SMappiInGs lt 22444se uyenreeeiecbecddeadende dee Loe heehee datadan 95 SPN EVENS css esa eee EER a AG a Rea aaa aeas 96 USING the NIDpIe EOIS si245bneo eed bares apteoeuta esr a tenes d 98 Cutting events in ripple mode 0 00 eee tenes 98 Deleting events in ripple mode 00 ees 100 Pasting events in ripple MOde 0 eee 101 Accessing event propertieS 0 00 cece eee eee eee 103 Changing the active take S NaMe 0 2 eee tees 104 WISING the DITCH SIMs e320 e to sie dg ool atin hc ew antey ae a Ble eral ante al aes 106 Seting CVENESWITCMES oy 2 4 wee ten a a Aa ee oes PEEP
143. drop down E Selection bar i a E TutorialWoiceover waw Ii 7 LK j Open sound editor O T 00 00 05 00 00 10 aa a Halla Zoom in out 00 00 06 984 00 00 08 113 00 00 01 128 Marker bar Ruler 00 00 00 E 4 ty gt MY Selection tab Trimmer Explorer Transport bar ia gt Ad DD History drop down This drop down list displays all the events in your current project You may open a media file in the Trimmer by selecting its filename from the list Marker bar This area displays the markers that you place along the media file s timeline The marker bar is identical to the one in the Track View pg 80 Save button e If you have added markers or regions to a media file in the Trimmer you can save that data to the referenced media file for use in the sound editor or in later projects Selection bar The selection bar is identical to the one found in the Track View Use it to select portions of audio that you would like to place on a track or for setting regions pg 67 Selection tab Click this tab to bring the Trimmer to the front when it is behind other docked windows Sound editor button a This button opens the event in your sound editor application pg 90 Transport bar The Transport bar is identical to the one found in the Track View pg 22 Ruler The ruler is identical in functionality as the one in the Track View pg
144. ducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Multiple Mono Renders each of the project s busses into two mono files one left and one right For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 4 mono files two right and two left This feature is useful if you are using applications that do not work with stereo files Therefore if you wanted to export tracks from Vegas Pro into one of these applications you would need to export each channel as a mono file Multiple Stereo Renders each of the project s bus into a stereo file For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 2 stereo files Therefore each bus in your project and the tracks assigned to the bus are rendered into a single stereo file Saving an aif rendering template You may create your own aif templates by doing the following 1 In the Template field enter aname Audio Template hy AIFF Template Ld 2 i 2 From the drop down lists on the A udio tab choose the settings that you want the template to use 3 Click the i button to save the template You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list making your setting changes and clicking the button Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the X button S a SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 9 Using wav controls and templates The wav file format is the audio standard for W indo
145. e Vegas Pro has too little memory to work with during playback T he Playback Buffer slider needs to be set in such away to balance RA M usage and playback buffering Therule isto set this slider as low as possible without introducing gapping Following isa procedure to help you achieve the proper balance between RAM usage and playback buffering CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 n a73 To adjust the slider to avoid gapping during play back do the following 1 O pen a project that has multiple events 2 On the A udio preferences tab click the Playback Buffer seconds slider and move it to 25 Playback buffering seconds c Fei ir 3 Start playing back the project 4 If the playback still gapping increase the Playback Buffer seconds slider slightly As you increase the buffer size the RAM meter at the bottom of Vegas Pro will indicate more RAM is being used 5 Repeat steps 3 4 until gapping ceases If you continue to experience gapping and the RAM meter begins to display in yellow or red you are experiencing gapping due to lack of RAM You can try the following to control the gapping within Vegas Pro e Decrease the number of events you are trying to play back T his may mean muting tracks or soloing a couple of tracks RAM ismostly affected by the number of unique events that are playing back simultaneously e Usethe M ix to N ew Track feature to combine all the events into one event For more information see Mixing multip
146. e Vegas Pro will create one Assignable FX control for all the plug ins the chain pn USING THE MIXER CHP 7 189 4 Confirm that the plug in s where added by clicking the A ssignable FX button 2 to view its dialog You may begin using the plug in controls or rearranging the chain s order CEE y Reverb 7 Noise F 4 4 s 0 ots a M Attenuate high fregs above 100 to 15 000 Hz 12 000 00 0 0 Arranging Assignable FX plug ins on the chain The plug in controls that you set are cumulative during playback For example when a signal passes through N oise Reduction it carries the R eduction s settings as it passes through Reverb then the signal carries both those plug in setting to the next plug in etc Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange the plug ins chain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next one in the chain Asa result some plug ins work better when they follow another For example the Dither plug in is best Suited as the last one in a chain H owever the chain s plug in order is strictly based on your preferences and desired output You may arrange the chain s plug ins from either the A ssignable FX or Plug in C hooser dialogs Arranging plug ins on the Assignable FX dialog 1 Click the A ssignable FX button 2 The Assignable FX dialog appears 2 Right click on the plug in that you want to move to display a sh
147. e Options Menu choose Customize Toolbar T he C ustomize Toolbar dialog will appears Options Enable Snapping Fa Snap lio laid Etri Eg Shem lo Make sapien Available toolbar buttons Separator E Save As Delete Dell 1 Trim Crop Ctrl T iF Lock Play Space Il Pause Enter Chae Mona we Buttons available to add to the Toolbar 2 On the Available toolbar buttons pane use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and select the it The buttons icons are what will be displayed on the Toolbar 3 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order For example if you want to add the Trim Crop button and want it to precede the C ut button select the Cut button on the Current toolbar buttons pane Selected button above this mae Trim CTOp purton in this example will be will be added selected button y i mae added above and E Tri Crop CT precede the Cut button on the Toolbar E Cut Ctrl e CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 mMM 259 4 Click the Add button The new button will be added above the selected button on the Current toolbar buttons pane M Note You may also double click a button to add it to the Toolbar S 5 Repeat steps 2 4 to add more buttons to the Toolbar 6 Click the Close button to save the Toolbar settings and close the C ustomize Toolbar dialog Re
148. e W indows Docking A rea or float on the work space For more information see Docking a window on page 244 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 125 Viewing the Edit Details window T his window looks and acts similar to an electronic soreadsheet You may sort add or change information rearrange columns and perform edits to items in the project To view the Edit D etails window choose Edit Details from the View menu or press the ait 4 4 shortcut keys T he Edit Details window will appear R epeat the step to hide the window The Edit Details window will remain on or off until you change it again even after you exit Vegas Pro Edit Details Shows Events gt al fields T Track Stat Lengh End NumberofTakes Active Take Name 00 00 03 135 00 00 01 874 00 00 05 010 1 Yorceover 00 00 00 000 Edit Details Commands 1 00 00 05 082 00 00 03 965 00 00 05 047 1 Yorceover 00 00 05 118 1 00 00 08 975 00 00 02 604 00 00 11 579 1 Yorceover 00 00 10 236 2 00 00 00 000 00 00 15 763 00 00 15 763 1 Music bed 00 00 00 000 H Selected Events Use the scroll bar to view other columns in the window T he Show drop down list allows you to view categorized project information Following are descriptions of each category Events The Events category displays information about all the events in your project You may sort any of the information by clicking on a column s header The number of columns in the Events cate
149. e bee ate dad eee 32 Placing a media file On a track 0 cc ee eee eee teen aaes 33 Placing a event on the Video Ruler 02220c cece cece eee e eee eeaae 34 Audio event basics 2 000 c cece eee eee eee 34 Moving events along the timeline 00 00 eee 34 Track navigation i ose gett eae es B ace ek a and kee ed Ean aes ae eee 36 Track INUIMMOE oh estnbued en iou oes ee at te eee eee desa orale dared accaw usar 36 VIGW DUILLOIIS lt 2 ace 405 Gt i Oe a he ew a ee eect an erensn er ee Ol een ante a Bd 37 Track AX DUIO i sew sa sae ee hae ha Re Pe es OS OS dw Pe be ed ees 37 BUS QSSIGHIMEIL sana aneend iat iad Send tere eer ore ada antes ot eed ed eo kates See 37 Arm IOM Record DULLION nes cee BASS a Sb oe car ede dn tha Pe ee Bo oe 38 Ve CLOT erie oea a a doe ep te A are ees ee Gee eet ag ae et eee 38 SOIO DUNO recreo e a AN acne beet but ato eta a 38 SCHDDIS SUID cette ile eee ie Bae ee ete tei ees nee a ne ee ee 39 VoluMeTaIdE m erran eaa EEREN O A eee Wie BOL Ene Bee Eee eee ee as 39 Multipurpose slider 2 o 4 nee bie ede ete ieee ibid ieee eset es hb oh ed ee oe ees 40 a 3 Video event basics nannan nananman eee eee 41 Moving the video event nananana een teen chee baw aotandebiandesaccens 41 Removing the video s audio 000 eee 42 Playing Dack the project covet oie de a ae A eee 42 Play back within Vegas FlOwiavts ot iw dansaiansd oie baa akaeeangeane aes 42 Previewing to
150. e desired time unit You may also change ruler settings on the Project Properties dialog s Ruler tab For more information see Using the Ruler properties tab on page 267 foo 0015 Options Samples Enable Snapping Fa seconds UE Snap hoard Eire Semple Tim amp Frames to display Shep ohake hite z Ansa Frames shortcut Ee scaon amp F tid Spacing Time amp Frames Measures amp Beats menu Ruler Format are ae SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps SMPTE Drop 29 97 tpz SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Film Sync 24 fos Feet and Frames 16mm 40 tpt Feet and Frames 35mm 16 tpt Measures amp Beats Customize Toolbar SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Preferences SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Film Syne 24 fos Feet and Frames 16mm 40 tpt Feet and Frames 35mm 16 tpt Edit Ruler Offset Following are description for the different time units available in Vegas Pro Command Description Samples This option displays the Time Ruler at the project sample rate Time This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds milliseconds Seconds This option displays the Time Ruler in seconds Time amp Frames This option displays the Time Ruler in hours minutes seconds frames The frame rate is 15 frames per second Absolute Frames This option displays the Time Ruler in total frames from the beginning of the project The fr
151. e extra sample points in the sound file T his increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality W hen down sampling one must be aware of aliasing see A liasing Vegas Pro automatically resamples all audio that is added to the project s sample rate Ruler Tags Small tab shaped controls above the Time Ruler that represent the location of markers regions and loop points in the waveform display Ruler Time The Time Ruler isthe area on a data window above the tracks display window that shows the horizontal axis units Sample T he word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound H ere are some of the different meanings A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really only anumber which contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e A sound which has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects T hese recordings are called samples In this manual we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording T he act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it Sample Rate T he sample rate also referred to as the sampling ra
152. e information see Assigning tracks to input devices on page 202 7 Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Preferences dialog Working with busses Busses in the M ixer window are fully independent and may be adjusted separately from the the others You may adjust each bus s volume meter resolution and clipping controls a lt Ss l u GK 44 100 Hz 16 bit Mute 3 F 3 Playback device Preview CET S a aa Solo 7 q wuss Edit FX Stereo fader Meter Scribble Strip CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 91 78 jp Adjusting the bus fader You may adjust a bus s fader during project playback T he fader on a stereo bus is split so that you can adjust the levels of the two stereo channels To adjust the fader do the following 1 Click and drag in the middle of the fader to adjust both channels at the same time Or click the left or right fader to adjust either stereo channel 2 Release the mouse to set the desired level Adjust the fader Note Double click the fader to reset it to 0 0 dB If you have set each channel differently double click either the left or right fader to have the other fader match its volume setting LE Adjust each stereo channels fader separately Changing bus s meter resolution You may select a meter resolution at which a bus will display the signal levels that are being mixed W hen you change the meter resolu
153. e it from the View menu or press its shortcut keys pg 243 Otherwise skip to step 2 2 Click the windows title bar and drag the window below the Track View You control where the window will be placed by moving the window to the left or right 3 W hen the window s title bar disappears release the mouse T he window is now docked After a window is docked you will see a control bar on its left side This control bar enables you to close a ee expand and move the window out of ca Tae the Docking Area Close window 1 Expand window Shows Selected Events gt E x LW x racl Start Length S End Numt 2 1 00 00 04 758 00 00 06 752 00 00 11 510 Move window Note If you dock a window on top of another one the newly docked window will appear on Click tab to bring window to top the top layer The window beneath it displays a title tab which you can click to bring it to the top layer or press the window s shortcut keys to display it NN SS k Explorer Trimmer CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 245 Using the Explorer window The Explorer window works similarly to the Windows 9x and NT file management Explorer included with your operating system Primarily you will use the Explorer window to place media files into your projects H owever the Explorer windo
154. e media copied into the same folder as the project Save as type Vegas Project veg I Copy all media with project 5 Click the Save button on the Save A s dialog Save As dialogs check boxes The Save A sdialog has three check boxes which you can used when saving your file or rendering it to a different format T hese check boxes appear in the lower left corner of the dialog Vegas Pro veg projects only This option copies the media that is referenced in EA Cyclase ct pees the project to the same folder to which you are saving the project for portability I Render entire project Il Save project markers in media file If you have a time selection in your project this option ensures that the entire project is rendered If you do not select this option only the time selection is rendered If your project contains markers or regions you may save that information in the rendered file Saving markers into a media file can enhance the end user s interaction with the media file CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 2 18 Rendering projects R endering refers to the process of converting the Vegas Pro project into one file and formatting it for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming media C D ROM etc The project file is not overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You may return to the original project to make edits or adjustments and render it again T he following t
155. e name O nce the new folder is created you may begin moving media files to it or move it to a new location Renaming media files and folders You may rename media files and folders that are not currently being used in an open project within the Explorer window If you try to rename a media file or folder that is used in an open project Vegas Pro will notify you of a sharing violation Save and close the open project before renaming these project items To rename a media file or folder do the following 1 Select a media file or folder in the Tree View or Contents List pane 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu IRENA Delete 4 TutorialFinal way Pp a _ 4d 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename 4 Type the new name for the media file or folder and press the key to save the name Note If the media file or folder that you renamed is being used in a project Vegas Pro will prompt you to set the new path where the project s media file s reside ES i E Music Delta way This file could not be found in the specified folder It may be on the Vegas CD ROM Would you like to look in a new location for this file i No No toall Cancel CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 NN G9 Deleting media files and folders You may delete media files and folders that are not currently being used in an open project within the Explorer window If you try to delete a media file or folder that is used in an open project Vega
156. e project Displays whether or not the event is muted Displays whether or not the event is looped for playback Displays whether or not the event is locked Displays whether or not the event is normalized Displays when in the event the snap to offset is positioned Selected Events T he Selected Events category is visually identical to the Events category except the Edit Details window only displays information about selected events in your project This category is useful when your project has many events and you only want to see and edit the selected event Edit Details Commands Shows Selected Events Selected Events ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING Edit function Move the event to a different location by entering a different track number pg 35 Enter a different value to cause the event to begin playback sooner or later in the project pg 34 Enter a different value to increase or decrease the event s playback time Enter a different value to cause the event to end playback sooner or later in the project pg 34 This column may not be edited it is for informational purposed However you may work with recorded takes outside the Edit Details window pg 208 Enter a different name pg 104 Enter a different value to cause the take to playback sooner or later from the source media file Enter a new media file reference path for the event to use Toggle the event s selection by clicking the chec
157. e spectrum of quality and price Vegas Pro will work with any W indows compatible sound card Stereo Mixer implementation that includes 2 discrete channels Surround Mixer implementation that includes 6 discrete channels Tempo Tempo isthe rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in Beats Per M inute BPM Time Format T he format by which Vegas Pro displays the Time Ruler and selection times T hese include Time Seconds Frames and all Standard SM PTE frame rates T he status format is set for each sound file individually Time Signature See Beats per M easure Track A discrete timeline for audio data A udio events sit on audio tracks and determine when a sound starts and stops M ultiple audio tracks are mixed together to give you a composite sound that you hear through your speakers Trim Crop A function that will delete all data in a sound file outside of the current selection U Law Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines u Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and A sian telecommunications Law isvery similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B n a297 Undo Buffer Thisisthe temporary file created before you do any processing to a project T his
158. e the high shelf cutoff frequency This setting may also function as a low pass filter when you increase the rolloff control Frequency Hz control Frequency Ha CT fal fi o0 This control determines the high or low cutoff frequency depending on whether the band mode is set to either High or Low shelf If the band mode is set to Band then the Frequency control sets the center frequency level Gain dB control Gain dE Tmn am 0 0 This control determines the overall gain volume that is applied to the selected band Increasing the Gain control causes the frequency range to play back louder C onversely decreasing the Gain control causes the frequency range to play back quieter Rolloff dB oct control Rolloff dB oct E aa This control is only available when Low shelf or High shelf band mode is selected T he R olloff filter determines the number of decibels that are reduced per octave the filter s steepness Bandwidth control Bandwidth oct ag W c fi This control is only available when Band is selected as the band mode Bandwidth determines the range of affected frequencies around the center frequency that are attenuated or boosted by the EQ CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 152 Using the Compression plug in T he Compression plug in allows you to minimize the dynamic range and control the signal s volume fullness and punch A Iso you can prevent volume clipping as you increase the signal
159. ect veg Vegas Project veg AIFF all AIFF aif MP3 Audio mp3 RealMedia G2 rm K K AIF MP3 iyegas EDL tet Vegas Project veg Video for Windows avi Wave Microsoft way Wave Microsoft F way windows Media Audio wma Windows Media Audio ma Windows Media Format asf Windows Media Format asf Vegas Project veg WAV WMA AFE fa Wave Micrazoftl wav Windows Media Audio ma Windows Media Format ast wave Microsoft wav Windows Media Audio wma Windows Media Format ast 5 If necessary select any applicable check boxes pg 217 6 Click the Save button A status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro U pon completion of the render your Vegas Pro project is ready for distribution and playback E o lt Status bar Note You may cancel the rendering process Cancel by clicking the XJ button on the status bar button Asn SX CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 22 SS 999 II Rending to a video format You may render a project with audio and video to an avi file With this format you may set the audio portion s frequency bit depth channel and sample rate In addition you can set the frame rate frame size and compression to which the Vegas Pro project will be rendered For more information see Using avi controls and templates on page 232 To render a Vegas Pro project to an avi file do the following 1 Fr
160. ect For more information see Using the Audio properties tab on page 265 Each bus may be routed to a specific output device of your choosing You may notice that some of the busses are grayed out because they have not been added to your project yet H owever you may still configure the busses not currently in use so they will be ready when you add them later You can add busses to your project using the Project Properties A udio tab For more information see Using the Audio properties tab on page 265 To route busses to hardware do the following 1 Click the Use a Custom Routing radio button Use a custom bus routing ey Note When the Always Use Sound Mapper radio button is selected you can not assign the busses to different hardware devices All busses will use the hardware that is assigned to the Microsoft Sound Mapper To view this information access the Multimedia control panel on your computer i CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 27 1 2 In the table click the radio button in the output device s row and in the bus s column to assign a bus to a specific output device Preferences RAEI General Routing Audio Syne Bus to hardware assignments Use Microsoft Sound Mapper for all busses Use a custom bus routing Po Preview Bus Bus B Bus C Bus D Bus E Bus F Microsoft Sound Mapper C iC oo C CcC GCG Sound card d e e e 8 s Sound card oe ee ee en Sound card ae oe ee ee ee Sou
161. ect Default Mono 44 700 Hz 16 bit PCM stereo 44 700 Hz 16 bit PCM Multiple Mono 44 700 Hz 16 bit PCM Multiple Stereo 44 100 Hz 16 bit PEM I Render entire project e Click the Render entire project check box if you did not remove the time selection but want to include all the events in your project in the new mixed down track except muted tracks WORKING WITH TRACKS 1 8 UUU 3 Click the Save button to mix down the time selection or project to a new track Asthe tracks are being mixed down you will see a status bar appear in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro E lt lt PFS _ lt lt lt lt lt le Status bar Note You may cancel the rendering process Cancel by clicking the X button on the status bar button EK A fter Vegas Pro mixes down the new track it will appear at the bottom of the Track View If you mixed down the entire project you may delete the other tracks from the project since they are all contained on the new track a a4 Rendering Presentation waw Creating a mix to new template You may create your own templates for mixing down tracks or projects W hen you create a template you may choose its name from the Template drop down list in the M ix to N ew Track dialog To create a custom template do the following 1 From the Tools menu choose Mix to New Track or press the ctrl m shortcut keys T he M ix to N ew Track dialog will appear Toole Mis To
162. ed on the strip Type the new track name Rename Duplicate Track gare Insert Audia Track say If the track already has been 5 l Delete Tee named you will see the previously Double click and type then name Right click entered name 2 Pressthe key to save the track s name Organizing tracks Vegas Pro is flexible when organizing your tracks You can leave your tracks alone and work with them as they are added H ow you organize tracks is strictly based on your preferences H owever if your project contains several tracks organizing them can save time in editing Reordering tracks W hen you create tracks Vegas Pro arranges them in the order that they were added You may reorder the tracks Only the order changesin the Track List and Track View project playback is unaffected You may reorder one or more tracks at a time To move a track do the following 1 On the Track List place the mouse pointer on the track that you want to move 2 Drag and drop the track to the new position in the Track List 3 Repeat step 2 if necessary to continue moving the track up or down LL lt _ lt lt lt lt lt i Note To select multiple tracks click them while holding down either the key to select adjacent tracks or the key to select random tracks SSS WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 135 Changing a track s color W hen you add a track to Vegas Pro a color is assigned to that track This color may be
163. ee Bae Cancel Hep 3 In Template Name field enter a name and then type a description optional CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 238 JIII 4 Click the Next button to choose a video Bit rate setting Windows Media Services Encoder Template Windows Media Services Encoder Template C Use multiple bit rate video Encoder Multiple bit rate MBR video encodes multiple target bandwidths into a single ASF stream or file Multiple video bands are encoded This provides for the best client experience in a variable bandwidth environment MBR enci igher requirements Which network bandwidth would you like to use Encoder Bandwidth 37 Selection Single Channel ISDN 50 kbps actual Intranet 100 kbps actual C Custom bps Single bit rate video encodes one video band per ASF stream or file Best suited for delivering ASF content in LAN environments or when hosting ASF content on an HTTP server without Windows Media Services NOTE Video if selected will consume at least half of the bandwidth and is not available at rates below 19 kbps Bandwidth 5 Click the Next button to set the bandwidth settings 6 Click the Next button to set Resample rate from the drop down list Windows Media Services Encoder Template Which codec and format for compressing audio and video would Codec IV Resample prior to encode youka use Resample rate 44
164. een programs running on the same PC Sonic Foundry suppliesa VMR with Vegas Pro called the Sonic Foundry Virtual M IDI Router Waveform A waveform isthe visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 298 p Waveform Display A section inside of the Trimmer window that shows a graph of the sound data waveform T he vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range 1S 32 68 to 32 6 For 8 bit sounds the range is 128 to 127 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the left most point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file Zero crossing A zero crossing is the point where a fluctuating signal crosses the zero amplitude axis By making edits at zero crossings with the same slope the chance of creating glitches is minimized Zipper noise Zipper noise occurs when you apply a changing gain to a signal such as when fading out If the gain does not change in small enough increments zipper noise can become very noticeable Vegas Pro fades are accomplished using 64 bit arithmetic thereby creating no audible zipper noise GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B Index Activation code 15 A ctive take selec
165. eir respective tracks 4 Choose the input device from which the track with the selected event will record pg 202 5 Choose the recording method that the track with the selected event will use pg 202 6 Click the Record button on the Transport bar to begin recording R D gt EKA KY L Start Stop L Stop recording recording Vegas Pro will display the event s waveform as you record 7 Click the Record button or the Stop button on the Transport bar to stop recording RECORDING CHP 8 NN 7 Recording into an event with a time selection You may record into a selected event within a time selection T his option allows you to add for pre and post roll during recording The time selection is adjustable to increase or decrease the pre and post roll During recording the selected event s edges serve as the punch in and out points You may create multiple punch in and out points by selecting more events within the time selection You may need to split an existing event into three pieces so that you can select a smaller portion of the event to record into For more information see Splitting events on page 96 To record into an event with atime selection do the following 1 Click the Arm for Record button on the desired track s 2 Choose the input device from which the track with the selected event will record pg 202 3 Choose the recording method that the track with the selected event
166. election ripple mode 100 Desktop shortcut 14 Digital multitrack setup 200 DirectX plug ins 181 ii Dither plug in 158 dither depth 159 noise shape type control 159 presets 158 quantization control 159 Docking Vegas Pro windows 243 244 Duplicating a track 132 Edit Detailswindow 124 129 commands category 128 customizing 129 displaying 125 edit functions 124 events category 125 markers category 127 media category 128 regions category 127 selected events category 126 Edit history clearing 79 Edit tool selection 67 Editing time vs event 66 Email technical support 12 Encoding wizard RealM edia 240 Envelopes 113 114 adding points 161 event volume 113 fade curve types 114 fade in and out 113 hiding panning on track 166 panning fade curves 165 setting points 161 track 160 166 volume fade curves 162 Equalization plug in 149 band mode 151 bandwidth control 151 enable control 150 frequency control 151 gain control 151 presets 150 rolloff control 151 Equipment setup 199 200 basic 199 mixer 200 with digital multitrack 200 with MIDI option 200 European contact information Title page Event edge fade setting 273 Event editing basics 69 76 Event properties name changing 104 pitch shift 106 switches 107 viewingname 104 105 Event switches 80 112 locking 109 looping 110 muting 108 normalizing 111 normalizing recalculating 111 Event takes
167. en project EN foal e Artist Enter the name of the narrator band or artist s Title Poo being recorded into the project Engineer Enter the name s of the people who mixed and Artist edited the project Engines Copyright Enter the date and ownership rights of the Comight project Comments Comments Enter information that identifies and describes the project Check box Click the Start all new projects with these zl settings check box if your projects requirements do not change or you want consistent settings E a luli ec for future projects mea e _ T he following list describes how to work with the Summary tab To enter information click inside a field and type Press the key to move to a different field Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Project Properties dialog open Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Project Properties dialog Click the Cancel button to keep original information if any existed and close the Project Properties dialog CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 GS Using the Audio properties tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project will use to handle the audio Since audio requires a lot of disk space this page displays the available drive space where Vegas Pro stores recorded audio Item Description Project Properties Ei ES Number of Enter the number of stereo busses that you Summary Audio Video Rule
168. endering options available in Vegas Pro M any of the codecs used for specific rendering formats are updated periodically by their creators For the latest information about specific codecs contact their respective manufacturer Saving your project CHP 9 The first time a project is saved you will have two options Either option saves all the project s information track and bus plug ins volume and panning envelopes bus assignments Assignable FX settings etc The first option allows you to save all of the information about a project It saves the references to media files used in the project The second options allows you to save the project so that its media content is copied to that same folder as the project itself This option makes transporting the project easy and convenient To save the project do the following 1 Select one of the save methods From the File menu choose Save e Click on the fa button e Press ctrij S on the keyboard The first time you save a project the Save A s dialog appears SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS Save As Save in Big Storage E faa File name Untitled Save as type Vegas Project veg 7 Cancel l Copy all media with project T he subsequent times you save the above dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to store the p
169. ents on page 66 2 Select your time range if applicable Otherwise skip to step 3 are Undo Size Event s Ctrl z 3 Copy the event to the clipboard by doing one of the following Cut Ctrl e Press the ctrij c keys i e Click the Copy button Ea on the Toolbar Delete Delete From the Edit menu choose Copy Clear Edit History Copy time selection Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy F The original events are not affected and do not y a change CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 7Q 3p Copy time and event selection Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy 7 s The original events are not ad puo affected and do not change Copy event selection Selected events are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not 00005 affected and do not hus orn Pasting events Once information is copied to the clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items into tracks T he following procedures explain pasting basics W hichever wa
170. er s start or end point by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the region marker you want to name or rename T he pointer will appear as a hand m ap ye A et Goto End Select Region Delete 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box appears next to the region marker i Marration start 2 NFT i 4 Type the regions marker s name 5 Press the key or click anywhere in the Track View to set the name Selecting a region You may select the events across all tracks within the region for editing or playing back only the region To select the region do the following 1 Right click on one of the region markers to display a shortcut menu Goto End Rename Selected region Delete 2 From the shortcut menu choose Select Region a Note You may also double click between the region markers on the Marker bar to select it Ee GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 Ns Navigating to a region You may have scrolled to a portion of the project and do not see the cursor any more You may click in the Track View to move and view the cursor press the ctri or gt shortcut keys to move the cursor or use region to bring the cursor into view To navigate using region markers do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on any region marker that you want to position the cursor The pointer will appear as a hand dm Goto End Select Regi
171. erent in that it may have audio grouped with it If a video event has audio V egas Pro is preset to group the video event with its audio when it is placed A s a result the video event and its audio will always be moved together along the project s timeline To move avideo event do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on either the video event or its audio 2 Click and drag the events to the desired starting point on the timeline 3 Release the mouse when the events are in the desired location M Note Ungroup a video and audio by right clicking either event From the shortcut menu choose Group and then Clear CHP 2 QUICK START _ y __ _ _ __ Removing the video s audio A smentioned earlier video events with audio get placed together in your project H owever you may delete the original audio completely or replace it with new audio T his feature is nice for redubbing poor quality audio To remove the audio do the following 1 Right click either the video or its audio event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group then Clear to ungroup the video and audio Otherwise both events will be remove 3 Click to select the video s audio event The video amp remains on pm the video 7 ruler Fi e peA TE AA sere ee gree O e E e A e AE aE RRE qP aaan SE a Ded AE E Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Editor Before ae After 4 Right click to display the sho
172. es dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Project Properties dialog CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 266 p SS Using the Video properties tab T his tab allows you to set different characteristics the project will use to handle the video A Iso this tab displays information about the video contained in your project Item Override active video file frame rate Reference frame rate fps Active video file Attributes Frame size Length Frame rate Data rate Compression Check box Description Select this option to use a different frame rate than what is saved with the video in your project Enter or select the frame rate Vegas Pro will use for the video during playback Displays the reference path of the video contained in your project Displays the properties of the video event in your project Each property is defined below The video s frame dimensions and color depth The video s total number of frames The video s number of frames displayed per second The video s transmission rate in bits per second The codec that has been applied to the video Click the Start all new projects with these settings checkbox if your projects requirements do not change or you want consistent settings for future projects Project Properties Summary Audio video Ruler Reference frame rate fpa li 5 000 Active video file Attributes Frame size Length Frame ra
173. et until you change them again or reset Vegas Pro to use its default presets Viewing the Preferences dialog You may access the Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains four tabbed pages G eneral Routing A udio and Sync Preferences i x Uptions General Routing Audio Syne General Preferences Vv Automatically open last project on startup splash screen on startul s Snap To Grid Crl F8 Z Show logo splash screen on startup OW e Vay on startul IT Show active take name in events w Snap To Markers Shuft Fe AE iment w Enable Snapping Fa M Recently used project list 6 g Choose Language l English X Default All T he following sections explain the preference settings on each tab CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 269 Using the General preferences tab The General tab contains toggle check boxes T hese check boxes control whether specific feature are used with Vegas Pro A feature is enabled when a check mark appears in the check box Simply click in a feature s check box to turn it on or off T he feature will remain on or off until you change its toggle setting T he following table describes each toggle and how it affects V egas Pro Item Description Automatically open last project on startup When enabled Vegas Pro will open the most recently used project if Vegas Pro was Show logo splash screen on startup Show a Tip of the Day on sta
174. evel of the outgoing signal T he associated meter displays outgoing signal after the Compression plug in processes the signal CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 154 jp Reduction meter Reduction dB ERT oo T his meter displays the level at which the Compression plug in is lowering the signal s volume at any given time during playback The Reduction meter is a good visual reference to monitor compression values Threshold dB control Threshold dB EM Faw foo The Threshold control determines the level at which the dynamics processor begins acting on the signal W hen the signal s level is above the threshold level it will be compressed A lower threshold level means that more of the signal will be compressed H owever if the threshold is set to low the compressed signal may be distorted Amount x 1 control Amount 4 1 P 7 jo T his control determines the ratio at which the Compression plug in uses when processing a signal T he ratio is determined by how many decibels the signal must rise above the threshold value to result in a 1 dB increase in output level after compression For example if the Compressor plug in is set with a 3 1 ratio and the input s signal rises 6 dB above the threshold value the Compressor plug in only allows the level to increase by 2 dB T herefore the Compressor plug in reduced the signal by 4 dB SY Note A signal s levels which occurs below the threshold value are not affected by the
175. event into which multiple takes were recorded 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Mc opens Switches Take a Rename Active Group t Choose Active Delete Active Delete Properties Guitarlnitra Track 1 Recording 16 Take 1 Original event name List of takes Track 1 Recording 16 Take 2 Track 1 Recording 16 Take 3 Selected take Track 1 Recording 16 Take 4 ai take appearing in the project Track 1 Recording 16 Take 5 3 From the shortcut menu choose Take A sub menu will appear with the event s original file name in this example G uitarlntro followed by the recorded takes which are numbered sequentially The active take will have a bullet next to it er Note This listing of the original event and takes rotate as you make different takes active Also you may give takes more meaningful names For more information see Renaming an event take on page 210 S37 a 4 Select the take that you want to make active by clicking it CHP 8 RECORDING 21 0 Renaming an event take Vegas Pro names recorded takes by specifying the track number and the take number for example Track 2 Recording 24 Take 2 T hese take names are specific to your project but are not descriptive of what sound s were recorded You may rename each take and give them more meaningful
176. ew while playing so that the screen does not have to scroll to keep the cursor on it 3 Run fewer DirectX plug ins 4 M ake sure that the peak files are built for all of the audio data in the project before playing Peaks are only built for those files on screen so you can get into the situation where the screen scrolls and it ends up building a peaks on the fly You can play while peaks are being built but on aC PU bound machine it will gap for sure Why can t get my other DirectX plug ins to work as Track effects This version of Vegas Pro has a special DirectX interface at the track level It means that only DirectX plug ins with a special wrapper will work in that position The Track EQ Compressor and Dither plug ins will work there lt CHP gt lt CH P gt APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 284 jp ______ MIPEG and Quicktime Video Audio Video Synchronization Issues Vegas Pro isable to open M PEG and Quicktime audio video files that were encoded using Microsoft DirectShow codecs H owever there is an implementation issue that causes the audio and video to fall out of sync with each other T his happens frequently and it isnot consistent in its offset T herefore this issue makes working with these types of files troublesome W e are working to correct this issue for future versions of Vegas Pro In the meantime a work around is to separately save out the video and audio portions of the filesinto AVI and W ave files
177. fined by the Geneva Recommendations G 11 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in U nited States telecommunications A Law is very similar to u Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data A Ithough the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example M icrosoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International M ultimedia A ssociation s IM A approved ADPCM Aliasing A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with alow sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the N yquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear a low frequency rumble To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound T hissame anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate Amplitude Modulation AM A process whe
178. g jike number keys 5 Pressthe key to set the ruler s time T he value that you enter at the cursor s position will affect the entire ruler 00 01 55 00 02 14 2 Grid spacing Vegas Pro allows you to specify how your project s Track V iew is equally divided You may set the grid spacing in time frame measure or note units You may also set the grid to divide the Track View based on the ruler s time format T he grid appears across all track in your project and the grid s lines can be used as snap points For more information see Snapping to grid lines on page 94 To change the grid spacing do the following 1 From the Options menu choose to Grid Spacing A sub menu will appear 2 From the sub menu choose the desired time unit T he grid spacing changes to reflect your selection a Note In some cases the grid lines and the Ruler will not match This is because they are two independent functions ES Ei CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 nnn a J Working with the Toolbar Vegas Pro is preset to display the Toolbar below the M enu bar H owever you may move resize hide and customize the Toolbar to suit your preferences T he setting that you apply to the Toolbar will remain set until you change them again Moving the Toolbar You may move the Toolbar and have it float anywhere on the Vegas Pro workspace T he Toolbar may then be returned to its preset position below the M enu bar where it will
179. gation M arkers can be displayed in the Trimmer window for sound files that contain them but more often markers and regions are used at the project level to mark interesting places in the project Media Control Interface MCI A standard way for W indows programs to communicate with multimedia devices like sound cards and CD players If a device hasa M Cl device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia W indows software Media Player A Microsoft Windows program that can play digital sounds or videos using M CI devices M edia Player is useful for testing your sound card setup For example if you can t hear sound when using Vegas Pro try using M edia Player If you can t play sound using M edia Player check the sound card s manual Please contact your sound card manufacturer before calling Technical Support at Sonic Foundry GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B 291 MIDI Clock A MIDI device specific timing reference It isnot absolute time like MIDI Time Code MTC instead it isa tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI Clock is convenient for syncing devices that need to do tempo changes mid song Vegas Pro supports MIDI Clock out but does not support MIDI Clock in MIDI Port A MIDI Port isthe physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI gear This port can bea MIDI in out or through Your computer must havea MIDI to output MIDI Time Code to an external device or to receive M IDI Time code from
180. gl Preview as xi Mis To New Track Chrl hM Mix To Preview Ctrl Shift h Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E 2 Select the preview option from the drop down list Microsoft RIFF Wave g Microsoft RIFF Wave ded for w ros Fee ae 3 Click the OK button to begin the mixing process A status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro ___ Note You may cancel the Mix to Preview by clicking the button on the status bar nna EK W hen mixing is completed the associated media player appears and begins playback Status bar x Rendering to PRYOOO avi QUICK START CHP 2 err ang Using project properties You can view and set the project s properties by choosing Properties from the File menu T he Properties dialog appears T here are more details on properties later in this manual For more information see Working with project properties on page 263 Hew Chri h Open Ctrl O Close General project information Summary Audio Video Ruler roject Properties al mj Audio output settings 0 O M H M BE oe Save Ctrl 5 Sample rate H2 Save As by Video output Bit depth 16 setting S Recorded files folder Properties Alt E nter I Start all new projects with these settin Eed Ruler display Free storage space in selected folder 796 6 Mege Active video file E Tutorial T utorial avi Summary Aud
181. gory requires that you use the scroll bar to view them all You may use the right click shortcut menu to edit an event Edit Details Show Events jal fields d ox Tack Stt Length End Number of Takes Active Take Name 1 Yotceoyver 00 00 00 000 1 00 on 05 oa 00 on 03 965 on on 09 O47 1 Voiceover 00 00 05 118 Right click 1 00 00 08 975 00 00 02 604 00 00 11 579 1 Voiceover 00 00 10 236 shortcut menu 2 00 00 00 000 00 00 15 763 00 00 15 763 1 Music bed 00 00 00 000 Edit gt Coup Bute 20 0 0 I III Copy Ctrl C Faste Ctrl elete Pelete Choose Active Take 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 000 CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 126 T he following table explains each column and describes their edit function Column Track Start Length End Number of Takes Active take Name Take Start File Path Select Mute Loop Lock Normalize Snap Offset Description Displays the track number where the event is located Displays when on the time line the event starts playback Displays the total length of the event Displays when on the time line the event ends playback Displays the amount of recorded takes contained in the event Displays the event s current name Displays the offset into the source media file when the placed event begins playback Displays the path of the event s media reference file Displays whether or not the event is selected in th
182. h tabs controls Templates Vegas Pro does not include pre saved templates H owever you may create and save your own For more information see Saving an avi rendering template on page 236 A fter a template is save you may select it from the drop down list Thetemplate s properties or parameters will be displayed in the other fields listed on both the A udio and Video tabs Description T his text box displays any information that was entered when the template was created SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 233 Format Audio tab You may choose one of the rendering codecs available from this drop down list ACELP net CCITT A Law CCITT u Law DSP Group TrueSpeechiT M elemediaT M AXZ4000P music codec Vouware MetaS ound Voxmare Metayoice Yosma Netscape Compatible Codecs Vommare v1 1 6 Bitstream Mode Codecs Wosmeare 1 1 6 1 1 8 File Mode Codecs Vomware 1 1 8 Bitstream Mode Codecs Windows Media Audia V2 Windows Media Audia V2 Sample rate Audio tab The sample rate you choose directly affects the audio s quality The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Sample rate 44 100 a Bit depth Audio tab The bit depth affects the audio s quality like the sample rate T he higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Bit depth CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 234y Channels Aud
183. he same z a N A B R H owever you may move the event to a different track s timeline If you do the event appears as a simple outline and you will see its original track and position on the timeline Once you release the mouse the event will assume the new timeline position and track color ae gan Original track position hk _ ___ New track and position 3 Release the mouse to set the event s timeline occurrence 4 Repeat Steps 1 3 to move more events along the timeline Moving multiple events You can move multiple events along the timeline within a track or move them to a different track similar to the previous procedure In addition selected events do not need to be within the same track You may select events on different tracks and move them as a group along the timeline 1 Use the ctr key the key or the Selection Edit tool i to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 49 2 Place the mouse cursor over one of the selected events 3 Click and drag the events along their respective timelines If you move the events along their original tracks timeline their appearance color remains the same f E O Moving events along original tracks CHP 2 QUICK START 365 You may move the events to different track timelines In that case the events appear as simple outlines and you will see their original tracks and positions W
184. he time selection W hen information is deleted it is not placed on the clipboard Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not placed on the clipboard Existing events are adjusted to occur sooner in the project 00 00 00 Deleting a time and event selection with ripple mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection are moved forward in the project by the length of the time selection W hen information is deleted it isnot placed on the clipboard al aa A 1 1 1 W Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not E placed on the clipboard Existing events are This graphic is showing crossfades ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 101 Pasting events in ripple mode Once information is copied to the clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items into tracks For more information see Pasting events on page 70 T he following procedures explain pasting information when Ripple mode is enabled Vegas Pro always pastes at the cursor s position along the timeline To paste events from the clipboard do the following 1 Click the Ripple Edits button fats on the Toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the desired timeline location 3 Click either the track number or within the track where you want to paste
185. hide the drive or folders contents H Media gt E 2 Media e gt Media nd Music Click plus sign E Narration Click minus sign toexpand o of Video to collapse 3 Click a folder from Tree View pane and the files in it will display in the Contents List pane CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 ob Moving folders to different drives or other folders You may move folders and their contents to different drives or place them in existing folders by doing the following 1 Using the drop down list navigate to the drive and folder location of the folders that you want to move clicking It In in the Tree View or Contents List pane select the folder that you want to move by To select multiple folders hold down either the or keys Drag the selected folder s to the desired folder within the Tree View or Contents List pane If you want to move the folder s to a different drive drag it to the desired drive in the Tree View pane eee Note If the folder contains media files that are being used in projects Vegas Pro will prompt you to locate the media files when that project is opened again ps Moving media files to different folders W ithin the Explorer window you may move media files to different folders by doing the following U sing the drop down list navigate to the drive and folder location of the media file that 1 you want to move i E Music Delta way This file c
186. i Two events oe Information is available but will not play back a j prey Splitting an event does not delete or cut any information from the original event The original event s information is there but omitted for playback based on where either the event s starting or ending point occurs on the timeline Original event 14 Split position pi fn Separated events A Iso when you split an event the events abut each other so playback is unaffected on the timeline unless you move either of the abutting events or adjust their staring ending points You may split single selected events multiple selected events or a time range of events To split an event do the following 1 Select the event to be split To split multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 Place the cursor at the timeline position where the split will occur Or select your time range if applicable 3 Split the event s by doing one of the following e Press the s key e From the Edit menu choose Split ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 97 Splitting without a selection A ll events will be split at the cursor s position unless the event is locked The split will occur across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting Splitting event selection Only the selected events will be split at the cursor s position E
187. i byte data that is used by a computer s microprocessor Little Endian specifies that data is stored in alow to high byte format this ordering is used by the Intel microprocessors Big Endian specifies that data is stored in a high to low byte format this ordering is used by the M otorola microprocessors Envelopes Audio and Video Envelopes as used by Vegas Pro are a way of automating the change of a certain parameter over time In the case of Volume you can create a fade out which requires a change over time by adding an envelope and creating an extra point to the line that indicates where the fade starts N ext you pull the end point of the envelope down to infinity Equalization EQ The process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level EQ has various uses The most common use for Vegas Pro users is to simply adjust the subjective timbrel qualities of a sound Event A media file that has been placed into a Vegas Pro project T he media file is placed on a track or the video ruler and plays back as an audio or video event along the project s timeline File Format A file format specifies the way in which data is stored on your floppy disks or hard drive In W indows the most common file format is the M icrosoft wav format H owever Vegas Pro can read and write to many other file formats so you can maintain compatibility with other software and hardware configurations Frame Rate Audio A u
188. ight click shortcut menu Edit Eut Cirle Copy Ctrl C Paste Chrl y Delete Delete Regions The Regions category displays information about regions that are already placed along the project s time line T his category displays four columns each regions start length and end positions on the time line Also the name of each region if one was entered You may enter a different value in the Start Length and End column to edit a specific region A Iso you may enter a region name in the Name column For more information see Working with regions on page 83 You may use the right click shortcut menu to edit an event Edit Details Show Regions Commands Events Markers Media Regions Selected Events Edit Details Show Regions All fields E a a 00 00 05 028 00 00 04 001 00 00 09 029 Middle split in Voiceover Change start length or end Change or enter a Region name end position of a specific regions Edit Eut ike Copy Ctrl C Right click Paste Chrl y shortcut menu Delete Delete CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 41 2 8 Commands T he Commands category displays information about Commands that are placed along the project s time line This category displays four columns the command s position along the time line the command type its parameters and any comments that were entered when the command marker was place in your project For more information see Working with c
189. ignable FX pg 193 Output Master Fader Adjusts the signal s outgoing volume to the Assignable FX Solo Plays only the output of that Assignable FX chain pg 195 Assignable FX Displays the Assignable FX dialog and allows you to adjust their attributes pg 188 Meter Displays the incoming and outgoing signal level to the Assignable FX pg 193 Scribble Strip Allows you to name the Assignable FX pg 195 ee Note To use the Output Master Fader to control the wet dry mix make sure you set each plug in to 100 wet Use the Output Master FX return fader to balance the dry track signal with the wet plug in signal EE Adding Assignable FX controls You may add up to 32 Assignable FX controls to the M ixer window Each control can have up to 32 DirectX plug ins added its chain In order to have the control appear in the M ixer window you need to select at least one plug in for it to control T here are two ways to add Assignable FX to your project via the Plug in Chooser dialog and via the Plug in Explorer window USING THE MIXER CHP 7 187 Adding Assignable FX controls via the Plug in Chooser dialog To add and Assignable FX control via the Plug in Chooser do the following 1 From the Insert menu choose Assignable FX or right click in the M ixer window and choose Insert Assignable FX from the shortcut menu The Plug In Chooser dialog will appear far a Alex a Sonic Foundry Acoustic Mirror Sonic Foundry Multi
190. ij S on the keyboard The first time you save a project the Save A s dialog appears QUICK START Save As Save in Big Storage E faa File name Untitled Save as type Vegas Project veg 7 Cancel l Copy all media with project T he subsequent times you save the above dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to store the project 3 Type the project name in the File Name field 4 Click the Copy all media with project check box if you want to have all the media copied into the same folder as the project Save as type Vegas Project veg I Copy all media with project 5 Click the Save button Renaming or rendering a project using Save As A fter you have been working with your project you may use the Save As command in the File Menu to rename the project This option also allows you to render the project to a different file format Typically rendering to a different format means that the project is finished and ready for distribution For more information see Creating a copy of a project using Save As on page 216 QUICK START CHP 2 mMM 47 Rendering a Vegas project Rendering refers to the process of converting the Vegas Pro project into one file and formatting it for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming media CD RO
191. ile from the Vegas Pro Explorer T his procedure is a useful way to select a portion of along file and place it in the project R ather than placing the entire event and cutting the unwanted portions For example if you had along narration and only wanted to use the first five seconds you could place the file into the Trimmer select the five seconds and drag it to the Track View 1 In the media list select the media file 2 Drag and drop the file to the Trimmer window T he media file will appear the Trimmer KE Music bed way j test veg S85 Tutorial wav os a a a maan m an n mnn a z o Lod media file in the Trimmer lalla Drag and drop the Working tn the Trimmer window T he Trimmer window s main function isto allow you to work with one media file for placing portionsof it on a track and adding regions and markers The Trimmer window also allows you to play back the media file and export it to your sound editor program Placing smaller portions of the event on track A fter you have placed a media file in the Trimmer you may select a segment of it and place it in your project Selecting a portion of the media file will not affect the event already on a track Vegas Pro treats the smaller portion as a separate event even though it isfrom the same reference media file To place a smaller segment into your project do the following 1 Click and drag the cursor or use the Selection bar to make a t
192. ime selection T he portion of the event you want to place will be inside the selection Drag from the Trimmer to a project track 2 Place the mouse pointer in the selected region then click and drag the it onto a track ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 n of PY Adding regions and markers to a media file The Trimmer allows you to add markers and regions to a media file the same way you add them to your project H owever these markers and regions are different from project markers and regions which was described earlier in this manual For more information see Using project markers and regions on page 80 T he difference between the two is simply that project markers and regions affect the project while media file markers and regions are embedded in the media file W hen you add a marker or regions to a media file Vegas Pro does not add the markers to the project M arkers and regions that are added from within the Trimmer are only temporary You must save them if you want to use them again after you close the project After the markers and regions are added and saved to the media file they will be available when you open the media file in a sound editor program or in the Vegas Pro Trimmer M arkers are placed at the cursor s position You may also place a marker on the fly while the media file is playing back M arkers appear as red tags above the ruler A region is placed at the cursor s position or at either end
193. in CHP 2 QUICK START 30 A media file is referred to as an event after you have placed it on a track Tracks are the containers for audio events Each track can contain more that one event You may place events on separate tracks or place all events on the same track ogi L He Multitrack with ore Single track with single events did dui multiple events Os 1 oa i mr In addition you may place a video file on the Video Ruler If the video has audio included Vegas Pro automatically creates a new track and places the video s audio on it Video ruler with included audio on track below Starting a project W hen you first open Vegas Pro it displays an empty project You may begin finding previewing and placing media files and start building your project Vegas Pro supports many types of media file formats for placement editing and rendering to new media formats T he following sections briefly explain the process of finding media files previewing them and placing them within your project Finding media files to use T here are two ways to find media to place in a project using the Explorer window or the File menu and choosing Open The Explorer Window T he media Explorer window in Vegas Pro works similarly to the W indows 9x and NT file management Explorer included with your operating system You can expand and collapse drives and folders in the tree view T he content of selected drives and fo
194. in attributes pg 181 Meter Displays the playback level of the bus pg 178 Scribble Strip Allows you to name the bus Double click on the Scribble Strip to enter a name pg 180 Adding busses to the project You may add busses to your project at anytime during the development of your project A bus is most commonly used as a master control for one or more tracks and to route those tracks to a specific hardware output H owever you may already know how you want to handle a certain project and set up the busses prior to recording or placing media files The number of busses that you specify are determined by several factors that are based on your preferences For example you may want to have a bus for each hardware output that you intend to use or a bus for handling DirectX plug ins that you plan to use in the project Remember you may change the number of busses in your project at any time CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 1 UUU Busses may be added to your project from the Project Properties A udio tab To add busses to your project do the following 1 Access the Project Properties dialog T here are three ways to access this dialog From the File menu choose Properties Hew Chri N Open Ctri O Close Save Chrl 5 Save As Properties h Alt E nter Alt F4 e Click the Project Properties button on the M ixer window on the Toolbar e Press the ait Enter shortcut keys 2 Click the Audi
195. in chains via the Plug in Explorer window T he Plug in Explorer is a dockable window that allows you to view and choose DirectX plug ins that may be added asA ssignable FX controls To add plug ins as A ssignable FX controls via the Plug in Explorer do the following 1 If the Plug in Explorer is not displayed press the shortcut keys or from the View menu choose Plug ins 2 On the Plug in Explorer window navigate to the Audio folder and select the Fx folder If you have any presets plug in chains saved you may select the FX Chains folder and view those presets For more information see Working with preset plug in chains on page 196 Click and drag plug ins to the Mixer window PER e 2 ee El Plug Ins a Sonic Foundry Graphic Dynamics we SO Ee Audio oo FS Chains H E Track Foundry Graphic EG 5 K Sonic ok m Sonic Foundry Moise Reduction 7 Sonic Foundry Graphic EL WS Sonic Fi eee i Sonic Foundry Mult Barnd Dynamics HS Sonic F ty Sonic Foundry Multi Tap Delay WS Sonic F ty Sonic Foundry Moize Gate WS Sonic F Sonic Foundry Nose Reduction WS Sonic F We Sonic Fi ktt Sonic Foundry Reverb 4 3 Click drag and drop the plug in to the M ixer window Vegas Pro will create one Assignable FX to control the selected plug in ee Note You may add multiple plug ins at the same time by clicking them while pressing the or keys and then drag them to the Mixer window In this cas
196. ing the Toolbar T here are two ways to hide the Toolbar depending on whether it is floating or not e Ifthe Toolbar is docked or floating choose Toolbar from the View menu T he check mark next to the command is removed and the Toolbar disappears T he Toolbar will remain hidden until you display it again Close button E Toolbar tom w Plug Ins Alt 5 7 Video Preview Alt 6 e ifthe Toolbar is floating you may simply click on the close button in the upper right hand corner of the Toolbar Displaying the Toolbar From the View menu choose Toolbar A check mark will appear next to the command and the Toolbar will appear in its preset position T he Toolbar will remain visible until you hide it again CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 257 Reordering the Toolbar buttons Vegas Pro allows you to easily change the Toolbar s button order on the fly or via the Customize Toolbar dialog to suit your work preferences Reordering buttons on the fly 1 Press and hold the key 2 Click and drag the button that you want to move to the new location on the Toolbar You will see a hand icon m within an outline of the button that you are moving 3 Release the mouse to drop the button in its new location i _ _ lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Note If you drag and drop the button off the Toolbar the button will be removed a 4 Repeat steps
197. ing the X button on the status bar button Aster eer Congratulations You have just completed your first project using Vegas Pro W Data Rate 125 KBYsec CHP 3 TUTORIAL 64 jp TUTORIAL CHP 3 65 CHAPTER ens General Editing Ky poi s at pia ma gh a a thy a i Vegas Pro projects are multitrack compilations of events that occur over time T he eventsin your project are references to source media files on your hard drive or other storage device Vegas Pro isa non destructive editor so the audio eventsin your project will always contain their referenced information A sa result editing eventsin Vegas Pro isassimple as adjusting the events edges in out points placing and moving the events along the timeline T he following chapter explains general editing techniques and features that apply to a project as a whole Using the cursor CHP 4 W hen editing and playing back the project the cursor identifies where you are along the project s timeline The cursor can also be used when placing events in the project For more information see Placing a media file on a track on page 33 By clicking and dragging you may select a time range in which you can preform edits record into and play back For more information see Selecting a time range on page 67 T he cursor may be controlled by the mouse or keyboard commands Description Keys Description Keys Go to beginning of selection
198. io Video Ruler i Attributes S etti n g S OK Car i z F E h It A lt F 4 Tec Frame size 320x240x24 Ruler time format Time z Length 173 Frames Ruler start time Joo 00 00 000 I Start all new projects with these settings 5 na ae ee Beats per minute tempo fi 20 000 ata rate ec Cancel j Compression Cinepak Codec by Radius Beats per measure f Note that gets one beat 4 I Start all new projects with these settings Cancel E I Start all new projects with these settings Cancel Apply Saving the project The first time a project is saved you will have two options T he one you select will affect the project s file size and its portability Format Extension Definition Vegas Pro Project veg Saves all of the information about a single project This file format does not contain any media It saves the references to media files used in the project Also saved is project information track FX envelopes bus assignments and output properties Vegas Pro Project veg When the Copy all media with project check box is selected all of the media in the project with External Media will be copied into the same folder as the project file This option makes transporting the project easy and convenient Saving your project the first time CHP 2 To save the project do the following 1 Select one of the save methods From the File menu choose Save e Click on the fa button e Press ctr
199. io music and general Selected template s purpose audio only content el description Details File type RealMedia G2 Sure Stream TM gt Detailed description of selected Connection types 28K Modem H templates Cust Eliz hiema ustom wef dt IM erry Click the Custom button a cement AS start the Microsoft Betecsetn goes OE Advanced ox encoding wizard On the Edit ee dialog click the Custom button to start the Encoding Template W izard 1 IN Template Name field enter a name and then type a description optional Thi s wizard will guide yor you yeaa ke ce ion an d ing of encoding templates Select the item that best decribes the connection type s you want to target for the RealMedia users RealMedia 5 compatibility m C RealMedia 3 compatibility audio only M Type of target rate C SureStream TM RealServer G2 compatible Single rate RealServer and web server compatible Local Area Network LAN C T1 Line iM Emphasize audio video Tl Enable perfect play T Allow mobile play T Allow recording cat 6 Target Dee News ea tee Bandwidth 3 Click the Next button to set the bandwidth settings SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 a 7 E 4 Click the Next button to choose the audio s type for encoding Encoding Template Wizard Encoding Template Wizard Descibe the audio content of the media files you wan
200. io tab You may render your project to channel types Stereo M ono M ultiple M ono and M ultiple Stereo B a i mE a oi Multiple Mora Multiple Stereo Channel Description Stereo Renders all the project s busses to a stereo file The signal is saved to the respective right and left channels that you specified in the project This may cause clipping in the rendered stereo file You can compensate for the clipping by reducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Mono Renders the project so that both the right and left channels are summed to one mono signal This may cause clipping in the mono file You can compensate for clipping by reducing each channel s volume fader prior to rendering Multiple Mono Renders each of the project s busses into two mono files one left and one right For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 4 mono files two right and two left This feature is useful if you are using applications that do not work with stereo files Therefore if you wanted to export tracks from Vegas Pro into one of these applications you would need to export each channel as a mono file Multiple Stereo Renders each of the project s bus into a stereo file For example if your project has two busses Vegas Pro will render 2 stereo files Therefore each bus in your project and the tracks assigned to the bus are rendered into a single stereo file Change frame rate to Video tab
201. ion during playback lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 292 gt FS Normalize R efers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level U se this function to make sure you are fully utilizing the dynamic range available to you Nyquist Frequency The N yquist Frequency or N yquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the N yquist Frequency of 44 100 Hzis 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz will produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between 2 or more speakers Peak Data File T he file created by Vegas Pro when afile is opened for the first time T his file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost instantaneous T he peak data file is stored in the directory in which the file resides and has a fk extension If the peak data file isnot in the same directory as the file or is deleted it will be recalculated the next time you open the file Plug In A n effect that can be added to the product to enhance the feature set V egas Pro supports all DirectX plug ins The built in EQ Compression and Dithering effects are also considered plug ins because they work in other DirectX
202. istory may be viewed by clicking the down arrow to the right of the button on the Toolbar A drop down list will appear a scroll bar also appears if numerous undos are listed The top listed item isthe most recent edit If you want to undo a specific edit that appears farther down the list all edits above it must be undone as well To undo a series of edits do the following 1 Click on the arrow to the right of the ts button Hover the mouse iM ove Evert Move Event pointer and drag Split Event it down to select Split Event a series of edits Split E vent Paste Events Undo 1 Action Undo 5 Actions CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 78 3 Place the mouse pointer on the item that you want to undo Items above it will be selected automatically Click outside the drop down list to cancel undo 4 Click the last series item to undo it and all selected edits Vegas Pro will restore your project to the state prior to those edits W hen you undo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the redo history T his feature allows you to restore your project to a specific state Note You may also undo all edits by choosing eE Undo All from the Edit menu All edits will be Bedo Move Event Cirl Shift z undone and added to the redo history A ea Clear Edit History eee Redo command Pressing the ctri Shift Z keys or the R edo i button on the Toolbar will redo the last undo pe
203. it tool i to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the M arker bar The mouse pointer includes a left right arrow Ts 3 Click and drag to select the region N otice that events that were not selected remain unselected not highlighted oon f MAT mr ey Selected event Non selected event Selected event als Selected event Non selected event ied k 4 Place the mouse pointer over the time selection s start or end point to increase or decrease your time range selection GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 n o6 Basic event editing Vegas Pro allows you to perform simple event level editing T his editing includes common copying pasting and deleting procedures that you are accustom to with other programs H owever these editing procedures and how they are implemented depend on what type of selection is made event only time only or event and time selections Copying events Vegas Pro allows you to copy events or portions of events to the clipboard and paste them into your project You may copy a single event or multiple events C opying preserves the original event information that is being copied To copy events do the following 1 Click on the event To copy multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple ev
204. k box a check mark in the box indicates that the event is selected pg 66 Toggle the event s mute switch by clicking the check box a check mark in the box indicates that the event is muted pg 108 Toggle the event s loop switch by clicking the check box a check mark in the box indicates that the event is looped for playback pg 110 Toggle the event s lock switch by clicking the check box a check mark in the box indicates that the event is locked pg 109 Toggle the event s normalize switch by clicking the check box a check mark in the box indicates that the event is normalized pg 111 Enter a different value to change the snap to offset position in the event pg 93 CHP 5 127 Markers The Markers category displays information about markers that are already placed along the project s time line T his category displays two columns the markers position along the time line and the marker s name You may enter a different value in the Position column to move a specific marker A Iso you may enter a marker name in the N ame column For more information see Working with markers on page 80 You may use the right click shortcut menu to edit an event Edit Details Shows Wakes All fields Ly T PI 00 00 03 111 Start of Voiceover 2 00 00 11 545 End of Voiceover Edit Details Shows Markers F Selected Events Change the Change or enter a Marker name Marker s time line position R
205. ke a mistake during the tutorial just undo it by pressing ctrij z Let s get started Getting the tutorial folder First we need to get the sample media files copied to your hard drive T he tutorial folder is located on the Vegas Pro CD ROM 1 Insert the CD ROM into the disc drive 2 Locate the Tutorial folder on the CD ROM and copy it to your hard drive 3 A fter the folder is copied start V egas Pro CHP 3 TUTORIAL BQ Using the Explorer window T he Explorer window allows you to view and access your media files without leaving the work area This window works Just like the Explorer you use with Microsoft W indows 1 Locate the Tutorial folder on your hard drive 2 Select the Tutorial folder so that its contents appear in the media list za Tutorial tJ c x gt O Rp 3 Elway Storage E Musi Media Sounds i list ef Tutorial pee 7 Explorer Trimmer Once a media file is placed into the project it is referred to as an event Placing the video In the media list you will see several files we are going to place the Tutorial file 1 Press Ctri Homd to place the cursor at the beginning of the project 2 Select the Tutorial file in the media list 3 Place it by double clicking on it This will place the video on the Video Ruler and the audio on the first track at the cursor s position Audio track TUTORIAL CHP 3 ee oF Displaying the Video Preview W e need to
206. l R T ae aiii 3 Release the mouse to set the marker a ml 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to move the marker again Naming a marker You may name each marker in your project by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker you want to name or rename T he pointer will appear asa hand 4m 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box will appear next to the marker 4 Type the marker name 5 Press the key or click anywhere in the Track View to set the marker s name CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 82 Navigating to a marker You may have scrolled to a portion of the project and do not see the cursor any more You may click in the Track View to move and view the cursor or you may use markers to bring the cursor into view To navigate using markers do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker that you want to position the cursor T he pointer will appear as a hand 4 oog o o 90 00 10 Rename Si Delete 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Go to T he cursor s yellow tags will appear below the marker tag a aaa Note You may also move the cursor to each marker by pressing the ctri lt or H keys Se ees Deleting a marker You may remove markers from your project by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker that you want to delete T he pointer will
207. layback 26 project file 25 track view 27 view 27 window view 25 Labeling Assignable FX See Naming Assignable FX Labeling busses See Naming busses Labeling tracks See Naming tracks Locking audio events 109 M M ain window 19 M anaging media files 246 250 adding folder to Favorites 250 creating folders 248 deleting files and folders 249 finding media files 246 moving files 247 renaming files and folders 248 M arker deleting 82 naming 81 navigating 82 placing and moving 80 jF e CV Marker bar 20 Markers and regions 80 90 enabling disabling snapping 95 snapping eventsto 95 M edia files adding to Favorites 250 auto preview setting 32 creating folders 248 defined 29 deleting 249 finding 246 moving 247 opening 32 placing audio 33 placing video 34 previewing 32 renaming 248 video placement options 34 M edia formats for import 29 Microsoft Encoding wizard 231 237 MIDI Clock output 279 MIDI Time Code input devices 276 output devices 278 time display window 263 Mix to new template 168 Mix to preview 44 status bar 44 Mixer 169 198 busses 173 185 preview fader 170 172 toolbar defined 170 viewing hiding 169 Mixer setup 200 Mixer window 24 Mixing multiple tracks to one track 167 creating template 168 MPEG rendering 219 saving a template 228 template 227 M ultiple takes previewing 208 recording 20
208. ld 4 Click the Save button T he subsequent times you save the project the above Save A s dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes CHP 3 TUTORIAL G2 pS Rendering the project as an avi R endering refers to the process of converting the Vegas project into one file and formatting if for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming media CD ROM etc T he Vegas project is not affected overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process T he following procedure is broken into two sections setting the format and applying compression Setting the format 1 From the File menu choose Save As T he Save A s dialog appears Save in Ey Storage E amp l c Vegas Projects File name MyTutorial Save as type Vegas Project veg 7 Cancel Template v Custom Description I Copy all media with project Jo Render entre project M Save poectmakesmimedia me 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to save the rendered project 3 Type a new name in the File name field if necessary 4 In the Save as type drop down list select Video for Windows avi TUTORIAL Save as type Video for Windows avi AIFF aif MPS Audio mp3 Template RealMedia G2 1m Vegas EDL txt Description yeqas Project vec Windows Media Audio wma F Copy al meind
209. lders appears in the list View QUICK START CHP 2 31 Refresh view Move up tree JH e amp x amp gt O kp EI Ee Desktop a Change view button Ef My Computer aa Auto preview button ss oO a Stop preview button Beg Storage E Play preview button P Bmp 3 Add to favorites folder 2 I ei Delete selected items Gu eda Create new folder o amm Narration al videa i Ae Other hi Explorer Trimmer Ale Note If you cannot see the Explorer window it may be under another window Click the Nie ne all ee ea Explorer tab to display the window If you do P fou ee aa not see the Explorer tab choose Explorer from ia Miter enor NAL Vegas Pro windows are dockable To access lew play it a hidden window click its tab to bring m it forward U sing the Vegas Pro Explorer allows you to place multiple file types into your project simultaneously To find media using the Explorer window do the following 1 From the drop down list or tree view choose the drive or folder where the media is located S Note Vegas Pro is preset to display all supported file types However you may eA change the list view to display all files within a v Summary View selected drive or folder Details 2 From the list view you may place the file into your project by dragging and dropping or double clicking it CHP 2 QUICK START 32z The File gt Open option A
210. le tracks to a single track on page 167 If you are still experiencing gapping you may need to add RA M to your computer V egas Pro only requires a minimum of 32 MB However we recommend 128 MB of RAM to get optimum performance Adjusting the fade length for editing events W hen you place an event in your project you may resize the event by moving its edges For example you may place an event that is 10 second in length but resized or split it to play back only 5 seconds H owever the 5 seconds that you omitted for playback are still available W Automatically fade edit edges ms i 0 This control allows you to set Vegas Pro to automatically fade events at their edges where you have omitted audio information You can specify in milliseconds the length of the fade T he fade affects transitions between event edges so that popping is not introduced during playback CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 274 gt p ___ Setting the Normalize peak level W hen you want to normalize an event in your project you can control the maximum peak Vegas Pro will use when recalculating the event s waveform Normalize peak level dB o dE T his control allows you to specify the maximum decibel level used when normalizing an event For more information see Normalizing an event on page 111 Setting advanced audio preferences From the A udio preferences tab you may access advanced settings by clicking the Advanced
211. lowing 1 Place the mouse pointer in either the Track View or the Track List 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Insert Audio Track CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS Assignable Fx Remove sssiananle bey Audio Envelopes a Audio Track Chri Right click to Empi Ewert view pop up Insert Audio Track sitll Ee Time 2 Preferences ae Marker Mi Began Fi Command A Iternatively you may add an empty track from the Insert menu by choosing Audio Track or pressing the ctr Q shortcut keys Vegas Pro creates and adds an empty track at the bottom of the Track List Val Before track is added After track is added 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to add more empty tracks Duplicating a track You may duplicate tracks in your project and all the events contained on them W hen a track is duplicated the duplicated track is place directly below the original track Other existing tracks are moved down on the Track List You may duplicate one track or choose multiple tracks to duplicate at a time To duplicate a track do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer over the track that you want to duplicate D Note To select multiple tracks click them while holding down either the key to select adjacent tracks or the key to select random tracks e 2 Right click and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6
212. ls WINdOW 0c cc ees 125 Customizing the Edit Details window 00000000e cece eee eens 129 Working with TrackS 0000 cece eee eee 131 ThRACKiDaSICS i ew iw oew tis eth owned PENCEN een raed 131 Adding aMemMptly track 4414444 4440s ard wr ee ee eee eRe Red bimwanwar 131 D pli ating atrak sdas dun ana ante ware nu een owe we wae wae ce wae ave E 132 Beletro a TACK snes bts has aaa et Soa eee eae a ae eee een aucaude ees 133 Naming or renaming a track s 44 esa eae eae ee oS ea be 2 ee 134 Organizing TAC NCS tie ose saci a ds cetn Saco eter dnd angers tad sees Gear hee 134 Reorder TlaCKS ereere eene dine Maia dae daa au ae pace dca ac acne eee 134 Changing a track s color 4 03 ser bid eee Ree peed wees aw aaa Ss ea VERS aa 135 Changing track height ie cik soins wee oe bev hae ie Wis Se Okie Sia eee eae 135 Working with tracks 0 0 2c ees 136 WSING the Tack fadere srrer ee fon need pea eee eae wae wa ae en ee aa alae 136 Mating atack s4 ssc ee ee ee ee a ae da Pa a ee 137 SOONG a MUO evans eat E A aad AE oe teen dee ole E E E EE E E E 137 Assigning a track to a DUS 2 6 4 2 6449543 sain pia ee a et eae area aea aes 138 Assigning a track to an auxiliary DUS 0 0c cc eee ee eee 138 Assigning tracks to an Assignable FX 000 cece eee ee ee eee eee eeeaes 140 Setting up to record into tracks ananuna annn naana es ee pee eee 141 7 USING LACK IAC ses eer oarts adel enacted ait
213. mand marker aE Fi Ffwelcome to Sonic Foundry Vegas Command Ruler pE URL ww SRE com Remove sssiananle R A A Marker Begian On 0 E O0 20 Command Welcome to Sonic Foundry vegas SS boas SET lin Command he F F F Hide Command Auster Right click to place a command marker from the Command Ruler W hen you place command markers the C ommand Properties dialog will appear if the Command R uler is not displayed Vegas Pro will automatically make it visible Command Properties Command Parameter ic Comment Ce Positions 00 00 20 004 Cancel A Ear This drop down list requires extbodytext Wh TextHeadline that you use the scroll bar Title to find the command that Author Copyright you want to place HotSpotPlay HotS potBrowse All the commands are shown HotSpotSeek SCOTT EDk here for display purposes SCOTT Cue In only Use this dialog to define your own command or select a command from the drop down list T his dialog is also where you edit the behavior of the selected command markers The Command drop down list allows you to select the type of command to place The Parameter field defines the behavior of the command The Comments field is generally used to remind you of what the command is while you work on the project Its function is similar to naming markers and regions The Position field allows you to specify when in the rendered file the comm
214. mber and activation code The first time you start Vegas Pro the registration dialog appears You need to enter either the serial number or the activation code Either number will start Vegas Pro so that you may immediately begin your first project The serial number allows you to run Vegas Pro for 7 days A fter the 7 days expire Vegas Pro will time out If you purchased V egas Pro you can receive your activation code by registering either online or by telephone SSS Note If you have started a project and Vegas Pro times out you will not lose the project It will be available when you start the program after you have registered received and entered your activation code SS eee HRD An activation code is based on the Computer ID number where Vegas Pro is loaded Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate An activation code is created based on that unique number W hen you register Vegas Pro Sonic Foundry will generate an activation code for you Once the activation code is entered Vegas Pro will not time out it is yours Because the activation code is based on the Computer ID it isimportant that you have Vegas Pro loaded on the computer where you will be using it The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you install Vegas Pro Registration The registration dialog that appears when you start Vegas Pro allows you to quickly and easily register to get your activation code You may
215. ming deleting and playing back media files prior to placing them in you project The Explorer window works similarly to the W indows 9x or NT Explorer that isincluded with your operating system If you are familiar with this operating system utility you will find the Vegas Pro Explorer window easy to use If the Explorer window concept is new to you following are instructions that help you discover how easy managing your media files can be Finding your media files T he Explorer window s Tree View pane allows you to select the drive or folder and view its contents in the Contents List pane To select a drive or folder do the following 1 From the drop down list select the drive that you want to view Or select any drive or folder from the list that is already displaying in the Tree View pane ahi down list Fare a S My Computer os 3 Floppy A ay Ne C ay Storage E a E 4 download a Media Wi Music bed way 2feMB Wave Sound rea Tutorial avi 6 46MB Video Clip FWA Tutorial veg 12 69KB veg File Tutorial wary B 56BMB Wave Sound Removable Disk F d Voiceover way 221MB Wave Sound amp 6 SY H My Documents gg Network Neighborhood My Favorites ey My Briefcase E Explorer Edit Details Plugins Tree View pane Content List pane 2 Click the plus sign next to the drive or folder to display its contents T he plus sign becomes a minus sign Click the minus sign to
216. moving buttons from the Toolbar You may remove buttons and separators from the Toolbar If you have added buttons to the Toolbar removing unused or unwanted buttons allows you to maximize the Toolbar s space for buttons that you may want You may remove Toolbar buttons in one of two ways either on the fly or via the Customize Toolbar dialog Removing buttons on the fly 1 Press and hold the key 2 Click and drag the button that you want to remove off the Toolbar You will see a hand icon m within an outline of the button that you are removing 3 Release the mouse to remove the button 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to move remove more Toolbar buttons CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 2600 Removing buttons via the Customize Toolbar dialog You may return the Toolbar to its default settings by pressing the Reset button on the Customize Toolbar dialog 1 From the Options Menu choose Customize Toolbar T he C ustomize Toolbar dialog will appears Options Enable Snapping Fa Snap lio atid etree Shep lo Menenr Shiite Current toolbar buttons A New Ctrl M fe Open Ctrh 0 Save Ctrl 5 eer Properties Alt E nter Separator Ea Cut Ctrl e Copy Ctrl C Denke kelar i lt Remove 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove button T he button will be removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and not appear on the Tool
217. n alternative to the Explorer window you may find media in the more traditional method using the File menu and choosing Open W ith the File gt O pen option you specify the media file type that you want to use in the project wav avi etc To find media using File gt O pen do the following 1 From the File menu choose Open T he Open dialog appears Or click the Open gs button on the Toolbar 2 Select the media s location in the O pen dialog by doing one of the following e Specifying it from the Look in drop down list e Double clicking drives and folders in the list view e Typing the file s path in the File name field 3 Select the media format from the Files of type drop down list 4 Press the Open button to automatically place the file in the project Previewing a media file Once you have located media files you may preview them before placing them in your project The Explorer window has a mini transport bar with Play Stop and A uto Preview buttons gt Gk W hen you preview a file its signal is sent to the M ixer window s preview bus T his bus displays levels which you can adjust with its Volume fader To preview the audio file do the following 1 Select an event in the list view 2 Press the Play gt button to listen to the file 3 Press the Stop button select a different file or place the file in the project to stop previewing to the file a Note To automatically preview selec
218. n you right click on a meter In addition you may set the meter to use a different resolution and set it to hold peaks and valleys of the incoming or outgoing signal WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 153 Presets T he drop down list allows you to automatically set the Compression plug in controls by choosing one of the included presets You may also save your own custom presets for use with other tracks ofl Track Compressor o Untitled 1 5 1 compression starting at 24 dB 10 1 compression starting at 9 dB 2 1 compression starting at 18 dB Select a preset from the 31 compression starting at 15 dB list or save your own preset 6 1 compression starting at 12 dB Default all parameters Limit levels to 6 dB hard limiter Soft Limiter To save your own Compression presets do the following 1 Enter a preset name in the drop down list field 2 Set the Compression controls that you want to customize 3 Click the m button to save the preset SS lt lt Note You may delete any presets by selecting it from the list and clicking the button a N Input Gain dB control Input Gain dE E This control adjusts the volume level of the incoming signal T he associated meter displays this incoming signal s level before the Compressor plug in processes the signal Output Gain dB control Dutput Gain dB 0E This control adjusts the volume l
219. nd card T T T Cy C C C H Default recording device OPL3SA Recording H me e S Note Multiple busses may be mapped to a single sound card R N 3 Repeat step 2 to assign more busses to output devices 4 From the Default recording device drop down list select a device used when recording The following list describes how to work with the Routing tab Click the Default All button to return the Routing tab to its default settings e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Preferences dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Preferences dialog CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 272 yp Using the Audio preferences tab T he A udio tab allows you to set preferences to optimize how Vegas Pro uses your computer s components efficiently to handle the resource intensive audio that you are using in your projects T he following table briefly describes each preference M ore details of each preference is discussed later in this section Item Description Preferences EES Playback Buffering Sets the amount of memory General Routing Audio sync seconds Vegas Pro uses during project playback Playback buffering seconds gS 0 25 Automatically Fade Sets the fade length of a split M utomatically fade editedaesimsii 10 Edit Edges ms or resized event Nae Reece eect O
220. ng the normalization You may have Vegas Pro recalculate the normalization by doing the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties T he Event Properties dialog will appear CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 112 JIII 3 Click the Re calculate button to normalize the event again Event Properties RAEI Active take name Musicbed si Switches l Mute l Lock T Loop M Normalize Normalize gain 0 1 dB Re calculate Cancel 4 Click the OK button to normalize the event E a Note You may set the maximum decibel level used by Vegas Pro to calculate the event during normalization For more information see Setting the Normalize peak level on page 274 N Disabling event normalization 1 Click the normalized event s 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch to display the sub menu T he Normalize switch will have a check mark a Note You may also access the event s properties and deselect the Normalize check box ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 113 Using event envelopes ASR You may apply envelopes to individual events Envelopes also Known as A SRs attack sustain and release give you the ability to control each event s volume T he fade in fade out and over all level of the event may be controlled T hese envelopes are different than track envelopes in that they move with
221. ng them for busses or A ssignable FX Creating new preset plug in chains You may save preset plug in chains from existing chains or as you create them in the Plug in Chooser The first time you create a plug in chain you are adding it asa bus or A ssignable FX chain in the Plug in Chooser dialog Once the preset chains are save as presets they may be used as either bus or A ssignable FX plug in chains The preset FX chains that you save appear in the Plug in Chooser dialog ET MusicPreset ET MyCustomPreset ET PresetBusChain Preset plug in chains that you have created and saved Note If you adding plug ins by dragging them from the Plug in Chooser dialog you can still save those chains as presets For more information see Creating presets from existing plug in chains on page 197 NG Saving preset during chain creation To save a plug in chain while you are creating it in the Plug in Chooser dialog do the following 1 From the Plug in C hooser dialog select the plug ins that you want to use and add them to the chain area 2 Arrange them in the order that you prefer USING THE MIXER CHP 7 197 3 Click the Save As button T he Save plug in chain as dialog will appear Save plug in chain az EE MusicPreset z Cancel 4 Enter a name that you want to use for the preset 5 Click the OK button or press the key to save the plug in chain as a preset T he preset will be saved to the FX Chain folder in
222. nt s properties and deselect the Loop check box ee ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 111 Normalizing an event You may normalize an event to maximize its volume based on the waveform s highest peak without clipping the event during playback N ormalize may be applied to one or more selected events W hen you switch an event to normalize the Switch sub menu displays a check mark indicating that Normalize is enabled T he event will remain normalized until you disable the switch To normalize an event to do the following 1 Click on the event to be normalized To normalize multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch and then Normalize from the sub menu Eaa Selected event Selected event after before normalize normalize is applied Recalculating an events normalization W hen you normalize an event Vegas Pro analyzes the event and raises the volume based on the waveform s highest peak and then adjusts the rest of the event accordingly H owever if while you are editing the event you may have adjusted its edge to exclude the highest waveform peak In this case you may want to recalculate the event s normalization F Highest peak used for normalization before editing q Event edited after Highest peak used normalization for recalculati
223. nt remains muted until you disable the switch To mute an event to do the following 1 Click on the event to be muted To mute multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch and then Mute from the sub menu Selected event before mute mute is app Selected ae Unmuting an event 1 Click the muted event s 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch to display the sub menu T he Mute switch will havea check mark 3 From the sub menu choose Mute to disable it on the selected event s a Note You may also access the event s properties and deselect the Mute check box N ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 1999 Locking an event You may lock an event to prevent it from being moved or edited Lock may be applied to one or more selected events W hen you switch an event to lock the Switch sub menu displays a check mark indicating that Lock is enabled T he event will remain locked until you disable the switch To lock an event to do the following 1 Click on the event to be locked To lock multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch and then Lock from the sub menu Selected event Selected event after efore i
224. nt takes source file You need to manually remove unwanted media source files that were recorded By removing unwanted media source files that were recorded you will save on disk space For more information see Using the Explorer window on page 245 T here are two ways to delete event takes deleting the active take and takes from a list Deleting the active take The active take isthe event that appears on the Track View If the event take you want to remove is not displayed make it the active take before deleting it For more information see Choosing an active take after loop recording on page 209 To delete the active take do the following 1 Click on the event take to select it 2 Right click on the event take to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Takes and then Delete Active from the sub menu Or from the Edit menu choose Takes and then Delete Active from the sub menu Show im Trimmer Undo Delete Take Ctrl Z Open in Sound Editar Ctrl E Redo Delete Active Take Ctrl Shift 2 Switches Switches Rename Active Choose Active Group Choose Active Group r EE Properties Se ae Select All Ctrl Delete Delete Undo All Deltas FF Clear Edit History e Track 1 Recording 10 Take 1 Track 1 Recording 10 Take 2 The event take will be removed and if there are multiple takes the next take will appear on the Track View CHP 8 RECORDING 22 j Deleting event takes from a
225. o 258 hiding displaying 256 moving 255 removing buttons from 259 reordering buttonson 257 resizing 256 Track envelopes 160 166 changing panning curves 165 changing volume curves 162 deleting from track s 163 hiding on track s 163 Track features 131 168 Track FX 142 159 adding via Plug in Chooser dialog 142 adding via Plug in Explorer window 144 ix bypassing plug ins 146 Compression plug in 152 creating a plug in chain 142 Dither plug in 158 Equalization plug in 149 N oise G ate plug in 156 rearranging chain order 145 reference 149 159 removing plug ins from chain 147 Saving preset chain 148 Track FX button 37 Track List 21 Track Number 36 Track panning envelopes adding 164 adding points 164 deleting from track s 166 deleting points 165 hiding on track 166 resetting points 165 setting points 165 Track View 22 Track volume envelopes adding 160 adding points 161 colors defined 160 deleting points 161 resetting points 161 setting points 161 Tracks adding empty 131 arm for record button 38 Assignable FX send 40 Assignable FX assigning 140 auxiliary bus 40 auxiliary bus assigning 138 basics 131 141 bus assignment 37 bus assigning 138 color changing 135 defined 29 deleting 133 duplicating 132 expanding the view 136 fader using 136 FX button 37 mixing to a single track 167 multi purpose slider 40 mute button 38 muting
226. o boost or attenuate cut specific frequencies allows you to adjust the track s overall tonal characteristics The EQ plug in is set on the Track FX dialog which you can access by clicking the Track FX button i ge sea Click the push pin to keep SS AD Aa the Track FX dialog open on the workspace off Track EQ 0 a h p p Untitled H x P keep Visible You may affect one Frequency Graph or all frequencies Select either the tab or corresponding 320 B40 12k Z k Tk number in the M Enabled Frequency Hz m j mm fico frequency graph to Selected set a a band s band s Low Shet Gain dB j H afon MnO controls A selected band s number will appear red If you want to affect only one frequency range set its controls and exit the Track FX dialog The other bands will not affect the track s events Following are descriptions of each item and control found on each band s tab CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 450 gt SS Presets T he drop down list allows you to automatically set the EQ controls by choosing one of the included presets You may also save your own custom presets for use with other tracks HY Track EQ 15 dE notch centered at 1000 Hz 5 dE notch centered at 1000 Hz 60 Hz hum notch using four stacked filters Add air 3 dB peak at 15 kHz Add air boost above 16k by 6 dB Select a preset from the Anti D TMF T alkoff i Boost bass frequencies below 250 Hz by 4 dB list or save y
227. o tab if it is not displayed Project Properties Summan Sudio Video Ruler Enter the number Number of stereo busses of desired busses 3 In the Number of stereo busses field enter the desired number of busses up to 26 that will appear in the M ixer window T he busses will be labeled with letters in alphabetical order 4 Click the OK button to add the specified number of busses and close the Project Properties dialog e Click the Apply button to add the specified number of busses without closing the Project Properties dialog e Click the Cancel button to close the Project Properties dialog and keep the original bus settings USING THE MIXER CHP 7 175 Deleting busses from the project CHP 7 You may remove busses from your project at any time W hen you remove a bus from a project any tracks assigned to it will be reassigned to the previous busin the M ixer window For example if you have tracks assigned to four busses Bus A D in your project and remove Bus D the tracks assigned to Bus D will be reassigned to BusC Busses may be deleted from your project from the Project Properties A udio tab To delete busses from your project do the following 1 Access the Project Properties dialog T here are three ways to access this dialog e From the File menu choose Properties New Chri h Open Ctri O Close Save Ctrl 5 Save As Properties h Alt E nter Exit Alt F4 e Click the Pr
228. oftware license agreement specifies the terms and conditions for its lawful use N o part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without written permission from Sonic Foundry Inc Sonic Foundry and Vegas Pro are trademarks of Sonic Foundry Inc A II other products mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1999 Sonic Foundry Inc Table of Contents HTOQUCHON e rarse abou ae Gotan die Sauces Sa Ge eee ae hee ae 11 Welcome to Sonic Foundry Vegas Pro 1 ccc ee 11 Systemi TEQUITEIMENIS i ascaceedsveuiosexeacneees eer e DiE e 12 Tecnica SUDDO erian aaa e a eee ets 12 VED SILKE SUPPO es te et oe os aoe aa Gad aye dig doy ee er ce ee 12 Emal SUDDO sissien touteutowsocseesiedec4 ahaa saan eee eoetotets tds 12 PaCSWDDOle 42s 42e bad ten teh arae ai ee ech Shc ee cee eet 13 Telephone SUDDO tae oe tin ete eset eens dos bee ewes EEES aa es ee ee ee 13 Installing Vegas PMO tc wha wad acnecetdte 2s aii acho eis See eas ee a 13 Staring Vegas Pros eshte ss emis eewee ia es Sa a aaa awe 14 Using the SMOMCUIE 2 ac 25 eho aaa nade ner eaa eer eee eT Ea 14 USING the Start DUO eerie ih ore Fred bot ee ew Me ae ead wade ail erareites 14 Serial number and activation COde 2 cee eee ee ees 15 ReEGISHW AON oases wae eee EN ew eae eas ee Ae eee ws 15 REGIStCHING ONIN Es 3 6 lt sc ctuw
229. oise Ratio The signal to noise ratio SNR isa measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio it s 48 dB H owever in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics Signed Data that has positive and negative two s complement values and uses zero to represent silence This is aformat option when opening and saving RAW sound files Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard interface protocol for connecting devices to your computer The SCSI bus can accept up to seven devices at a time including CD ROM drives hard drives and samplers Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SM PTE time code is used to synchronize time between devices T he time code is calculated in Hours M inutes Second Frames where Frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SM PTE time code are 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 296 ____ Sound Card T he sound card is the audio interface between your computer and the outside world It is responsible for converting analog signals to digital and vice versa T here are many sound cards available on the market today covering th
230. oject s properties bus assignments output levels and plug in chains ee E Right click on a Resto fou HE 44100 Hz 16 bit ee eter to change aa lt n 3 x2 its settings 24 to 0 dB 3 3 xi 42 to 0 dE Inf Inf Inf _ 60 to 0 dB fo ta 0 dB 30 to dE w Show Labels Hold Peaks Hold Valleys HE INTRODUCTION CHP 1 y 00 0 0 0 0 sSSsSSSSSSSMhrioooorr 25 Keyboard command reference CHP 1 Vegas Pro keyboard commands are shortcuts that you can use while working with your project Project file commands T hese commands refer to the overall project Description Create new project Open existing project or media file Save project Open project s properties Keys Ctrl N Ctrl 0 Ctrl S Alt Enter Window view commands These commands display and hide the dockable windows included with Vegas Pro Description Keys Track view Alt 0 Explorer Alt 1 Trimmer Alt 2 Mixer Alt 3 Edit commands Description Edit Details Plug ins Video Preview Keys Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 6 T hese commands refer to the event editing that you can use while you are working on a project Description Undo Redo Select all Unselect all Keys Ctrl Z or Alt Backspace Ctrl Shift Z Ctrl X or Shift Delete Ctrl C or Ctrl Insert Ctrl V or Cut selection Copy selection Paste from clipboard Shift Insert Ctrl A Ctrl Shift A Delete Delete selection Select left b
231. oject Properties 2 button on the M ixer window or on the Toolbar e Press the ait Enter shortcut keys 2 Click the Audio tab if it is not displayed Project Properties Summan Sudio Video Ruler Enter the number of desired busses Number of sterea busses 3 In the Number of stereo busses field enter the desired number of busses that will appear in the M ixer window 4 Click the OK button to delete the specified number of busses and close the Project Properties dialog A II tracks assigned to a deleted bus will be reassigned to the preceding busin the M ixer window Click the Apply button to add the specified number of busses without closing the Project Properties dialog e Click the Cancel button to close the Project Properties dialog and keep the original bus Settings USING THE MIXER 97 Routing busses to hardware You may specify busses to use specific hardware for output W hen you installed Vegas Pro it automatically determined the hardware available for output on your computer R outing busses is done on the Preferences dialog T here are more details about routing specific and other preferences later in this manual For more information see Using Vegas Pro preferences on page 268 To route busses to hardware do the following 1 From the Options Menu choose Preferences T he Preferences dialog will appear Options Preferences HE w Enable Snapping Fa Rontin i v Snap To Grid Ctrl F
232. oject tracks may be routed pg 186 W hen you change a project from stereo to mono or vice versa the Bus faders and meters that appear in the M ixer window will reflect the change Mono bus Stereo bus i Using the Mixer Preview fader T he Preview fader allows you to adjust the volume and monitor output levels of media reference files when you preview them from the Explorer window or play them back from the Trimmer window T he Preview fader can save time while you decide which media files will be placed as events on the project s tracks For more information see Using the Explorer window Transport bar on page 250 USING THE MIXER CHP 7 n aN Adjusting the volume fader You may adjust the Preview fader while you are previewing a media file from the Explorer window Simply click on the fader and drag it up or down Adjust the Preview fader Changing meter resolution You may select a preferred meter resolution at which the Preview fader will display the media file s volume level W hen you change the meter resolution on Preview fader the other meters busses and A ssignable FX automatically match the selected setting To change the Preview fader s meter resolution do the following 1 Right click on the meter to display a shortcut menu Reset Clip 12 to dB 42 to dE B0 to dE F0 to O dE o g0 to 0 dB w Show Labels Hold Peaks Hold Valleys 2 From the shortcut menu ch
233. ol and are still experiencing cursor position inaccuracies move the Position bias control forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the audio device Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback W hen this option isnot checked disabled Vegas Pro will begin storing buffering project audio information prior to playback T his storing is very fast and unnoticeable in most cases H owever some audio devices stutter when you begin playback as a result of the buffering process If your audio stutters when you start playback click this check box to prevent Vegas Pro from buffering audio information prior to playback Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Using the Sync preferences tab The Sync tab allows you to specify how Vegas Pro will synchronize MIDI Time Code MTC to other software applications and hardware devices Vegas Pro can also chase to MTC from an input device which you may select on this tab T he following table briefly describes each preference M ore details of each preference is discussed later in this section Item Description Preferences E Ea Generate MIDI Select the output device and aa a cue eae Time Code frame rate that Vegas Pro will Bee MIDI a settings use when generating MIDI time de Output device 55 MPU 407 OCOD code TE oa ooo a a a a Frame rate SMPTE Non Drop 30 30 fps Generate MIDI Select the output device that l Clock settings Vegas
234. om button to change Selected template _ _ _ 28 8 video Y oice Custom control settings Creates video ASF content for clients or create delete i connecting with 28 8 kbps dial up modems a template Selected template SSB ued with content that is voice oriented description Each rendering format has its own controls and in some cases codecs that you can use prior to rending your project T he control settings and codecs that you select depend largely upon how you want to deliver the media T he following sections present and overview of each formats controls and template creation M any of the codecs used for specific rendering formats are updated periodically by their creators For information about specific codecs contact their respective manufacturer SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 223 Using aif controls and templates The aif file format is the audio standard for M acintosh operating systems To access this format s controls click the Custom button on the Save A s dialog T he Custom Setting dialog appears T he Format drop down list is set to PCM Pulse Code M odulation The Attributes drop down list is dependent on the chosen sample rate bit depth and number of channels Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the Template drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Project Default a aaa Stereo 44 1 kHz 1
235. om the File menu choose Save As The Save A s dialog appears 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to save the rendered avi file 3 Type anew name in the File name field If necessary 4 In the Save as type drop down list choose Video for Windows avi Vegas Project veg Save as Ippe Windows Media Audio ma Windows Media Format ast 5 If necessary select any applicable check boxes pg 217 6 Click the Save button A status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro U pon completion of the render your Vegas Pro project is ready for distribution and playback Status bar Note You may cancel the rendering process Cancel __ by clicking the X button on the status bar button sien al SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 221 Rending to a streaming media format You may render a project with audio and video to a streaming media format Streaming media can be used for presenting information via the W eb Vegas Pro can render a project to either Windows M edia pg 236 or RealM edia pg 239 players With these formats you may set the audio portion s frequency bit depth channel and sample rate In addition you can set the frame rate frame size and compression for the video portion Rendering to a asf or rm file This procedure is identical for each streaming format to which you want the project rendered T he only difference is the selection from the d
236. omate the volume you simply will not see the volume envelope s line until you display them again To hide a volume envelope do the following 1 From the View menu choose Show Audio Envelopes A sub menu will appear T here will be a check mark next to Volume Indicating that those envelopes are currently displayed 7 Toolbar w Status Bar 7 Video Ruler w Commands Ruler Show Audio Envelopes F E 7 dimeet ers Ean Rebuild Peaks 7 Video Preview Alt 6 2 From the sub menu choose Volume A Il volume envelopes in your project will no longer appear in the Track View w Fs w AUH A w Aux B 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to display the volume envelopes again Removing track volume envelopes You may remove a volume envelope from a track W hen you remove the envelope the events on the track will no longer have automated volume A Iso the volume envelope line will no longer be displayed It isimportant to remember that when you remove a volume envelope from a track and then add ait again you will need to reset the volume points To remove a volume envelope do the following 1 Select the track or tracks that you want to remove the volume envelope s 2 From the Insert Menu choose Audio Envelopes A sub menu will appear T here will bea check mark next to Volume indicating that those envelopes are currently being used 3 From the sub menu choose Volume A II volume envelopes on the selecte
237. ommand markers on page 86 You may use the right click shortcut menu to edit an event Edit Details zj Shows Command gt fal fields gt g en a 00 00 01 026 TEXT Welcome to Sonic Foundry Yegas Pro Welcome text Pa 00 00 10 031 TET Visit the Sonic Foundry Website Visit invitation 00 00 15 786 UAL WMA ganictoundy com Sonic Foundry UAL Edit Details Shows Commands nd Commands Events Markers Media Regions Selected Events Change the Change the Change the command s Change or enter command s command type parameters comments for time line reference position Right click shortcut menu Edit Eut EEA Copy Ctrl C Paste Crl y Delete Delete Media T he M edia category displays the media file reference paths used by eventsin your project T his category is for reference purposes You can not change the reference path here but you may change it on the Events category page Edit Details Edit Details Show Media hi Show Media X fan fielde g ka Commands byt File Path al 00 00 00 000 CAT utora Music bed way 2 00 00 00 000 C Tutorial T utorial avi Events Markers Media Selected Events 00 00 00 000 C T utoralkyoiceover way ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 129 Customizing the Edit Details window The Edit Details window allows you to arrange and delete columns from each category display and save the changes to a personal templa
238. on Rename 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Go to Or Go to End T he difference is that Go to places the cursor at the region s starting point and Go to End places it at the region s ending point T he cursor s yellow tags will appear below either the region s starting or ending tag Deleting a region You may remove a region from your project by doing the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on either the region marker s starting or ending point The pointer will appear as a hand 4 Go to End pees 00 00 10 Select Region Rename 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete T he marker will be removed from your project The region marker numbers will remain the same Vegas Pro will not renumber the tags as you remove them For example if you have five regions in your project and delete region 3 and 4 the remaining regions will be listed at 1 2 and 5 However as you add regions again Vegas Pro will begin numbering the missing sequence first CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 6 pS Working with command markers Command markers indicate when an instruction function will occur in a streaming media file or wav file being used in a radio broadcast environment Scott Studios data The following two sections define the markers for both streaming media and Scott Studios files Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file
239. oose the meter resolution you prefer 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to change the resolution again CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 4 72 pS Adjusting for clipping W hen you preview a media file from the Explorer its volume level may cause clipping The clip is displayed on the Preview fader s meter If signal clips the meter will display in red at the top with a clipping value A djust the fader control and click the red area with the clipping value to reset the meter C ontinue to adjust the fader and reset the meter until clipping is eliminated Click the clipping indicator to reset the meter Right click to reset clip change meter resolution and set the meter to hold peaks and valleys 12 to dB s 24 to 0 dB 42 to dE B0 to dE F0 to O dE 30 to dE w Show Labels Hold Peaks Hold Valleys You may also reset the clip from the shortcut menu when you right click on the Preview fader s meter M oreover you may set the meter to hold the peaks and valleys in the media file s signal Hiding Viewing the Preview fader You may choose to hide the Preview fader to make more room for other busses and A ssignable FX To hide or view the Preview fader simply right click anywhere within the M ixer and choose Show Preview fader from the shortcut menu T he Preview fader will remain hidden or displayed until you change the setting again Preview Insert Assignable Fx Remove Assignable Fx
240. op This procedure is exactly the same as other Windows based programs 1 Click the button on the task bar The Start menu appears 2 From the Start menu choose Programs The Programs list menu appears fo Sonic Foundry Vegas TL Sonic Foundry Vegas This graphic displays the default location where Vegas Pro was installed If you specified a different directory during installation then navigate to that directory via this menu 3 From the Programs menu choose Sonic Foundry Vegas A sub menu appears 4 From the sub menu choose Sonic Foundry Vegas to start the program The registration dialog window appears Once you register Vegas Pro this dialog will not appear again Thank you for using Sonic Foundry Vegas You are currently running the free trial version and must have a serial number or activation code to proceed Enter either the serial or activation code here If you have Internet access you may instantly register with us and receive a number with a quick trip to our website You may also choose to register over the phone with a rc m would like to register online would like to register over the phone would like to register online would like to register over the phone 5 Enter either the serial number or the activation code and click to start using Vegas Pro The serial number is located on the title page of the manual INTRODUCTION CHP 1 R a Serial nu
241. ope line Or smply double click to add a envelope point 7 Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade 3 Repeat step 2 asto add more points on the envelope Set to 6 0 dB Set to O dB Set to Inf dB Add Point Note If you add too many points you may delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu Or you may Linear Fade start over adding envelope points by selecting ee Reset All from the shortcut menu aT eK Preset All Linear Fade w Fast Fade Slow Fade Select None Setting the volume envelope points Once the envelope points have been added you may raise and lower them to different decibel dB levels along the timeline to automate the track s volume You may move one point at a time even during play back and listen to the results in real time A Iso you may set the type of fade curve between each envelope point To move an envelope points do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on an envelope point T he mouse pointer appears as a hand h CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 162z 2 Click and drag the points to the desired position A s you move an envelope point an information box displays both the point s occurrence on the timeline and its decibel level You can only set one point at a time or use the Envelope tool to select and move multiple points at a time fa ey Volume at 00 00 08 852 is 0 0 dB Volume at 00 00 03 352 ts 7 0 dB 3 Click either
242. ortcut menu I Noise Reduction Bypass Move Aight x Remove Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG 3 From the shortcut menu choose Move Right or Move Left 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to continue arranging plug ins CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 190 Arranging plug ins on the Plug in Chooser dialog To arrange the chain s plug in order do the following 1 Click on the A ssignable FX button a The A ssignable FX dialog appears en o e G 2 On the A ssignable FX dialog click the Edit Plug in Chain button 2 to display the Plug in Chooser dialog T here are two ways to arrange plug ins on your chain Drag and drop the plug in to a new location in the chain e Select the plug in and click either the left 8 or right move button hl i hitt Plug In Aight gt i co Reverb Graphic EG Noise Reduction gt ii E of Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG H a HF is mei 3 Once you get the desired chain order click the OK button to save it and close the Plug in Chooser dialog Bypassing plug ins on the Assignable FX chain You may bypass a plug in on the chain by clicking its check box T he plug in will remain bypassed until you enable it again Bypassing a plug in prevents its processing of the signal You may bypass plug ins either from the A ssignable FX dialog or the Plug in Chooser dialog Effect enabled Effect bypassed I Noise Reduction
243. osi Cr Set to Center clicking an envelope point ana choosing a pan EEN E E nae setting from the shortcut menu Or choose nelle Delete Select All from the shortcut menu to raise or lower all points on the envelope Reset All Reset Al Ee Changing the pan fade curves Between each envelope point you may set the type of pan fade curve fast linear and slow From the selected envelope point fade curves are applied to the pan lines that occur later on the timeline To set the pan fade curve do the following 1 Right click on a point to display a shortcut menu Set to 100 Left Linear Fade Slow Fade Slow fade P Fast fade ONDA Linear fade the graphic shows you may have more Select All Reset Al than one type of fade curve on an envelope 2 From the shortcut menu choose the curve type to be applied to the pan line CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1665 Hiding the panning envelopes A fter you have set your panning envelopes on the tracks you may hide them from the Track View Hiding panning envelopes will not affect playback The points that you set will still automate the panning you simply will not see the panning envelope s line until you display them again To hide a panning envelope do the following 1 From the View menu choose Show Audio Envelopes A sub menu will appear T here will be a check mark next to Pan indicating that those envelopes are currently displayed Well
244. ot need to place the entire media file just the region s that you want 4 i Music bed wav Start E Leng 00 00 09 126 00 00 11 568 00 00 02 442 CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 252 pS Summary View T his information appears below the Contents List pane It displays information about the selected media file s Music bed way w Summary Wie Audio 44 100 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 00 15 763 Details In the Contents List pane the files display their size date and when it was last created or modified File Folder 2 7 2MB Poe v Details a All Files In the Contents List pane all file types including non media files in the selected folder are displayed Finished Project File Folder n Music bed stk TO 67KB SFE File Music bed wary 2feMB Wave Sound a test veg 10 30KB veg File aa Tutorial avi 6 46MB Video Clip EENE Tutorial avi stk S 80K6 SFE File 3 Ei Tutorial avistk1 S 80K6 SFE File CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 253 Changing the Ruler settings You may specify a time format that the Vegas Pro ruler displays T he ruler located above the Track View displays real time in several different formats T he real time format that you select affects how the ruler and Time window will display time units To change the ruler s format right click on the ruler and select the desired time format from the shortcut menu Or from the Options menu choose Ruler Format and select th
245. ould not be found in the specified folder It may be on the Vegas CD ROM Release the mouse and the folder s and its contents will be placed in the new location Would you like to look in a new location for this file No No toall Cancel In the Contents List pane select the file you want to move by clicking it To select multiple files or folders hold down either the or keys 3 Drag the selected file s to the desired folder in the Tree View pane 4 Release the mouse and the media file s will be placed in the folder CHP 10 a Note If the media file you moved is being used in a project Vegas Pro will prompt you to locate the media files when that project is opened again ps i E Music Delta way This file could not be found in the specified folder It may be on the Vegas CD ROM Would you like to look in a new location for this file Yes No No toall Cancel CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 248 Creating a new media folder You may create folders within the Explorer window to store media files or other folders by doing the following 1 N avigate to the drive and folder location where you want to create the new folder 2 Click the N ew button A folder will appear in the Contents List pane 3 Select the newly created folder and right click to display a shortcut menu 4 From the shortcut menu choose Rename 5 Type the name of the new folder and press the key to save th
246. our OWA preset Boost frequencies above 7 kHz Fletcher Munson curve low volume compensation Hise cut cut above 8 kHz by 6 dB Remove low rumble below 80 Hz Remove very low and inaudible frequencies below 20 H Reset all parameters To save your own EQ presets do the following 1 Enter a preset name in the drop down list field 2 Set the EQ controlson each band that you want to customize 3 Click the button to save the preset D Note You may delete any presets by selecting it from the list and clicking the X button _ ee f T Enable control M Enabled Each frequency tab has this control that allows you to bypass the selected band without adversely affecting its settings WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 oe 151 Band mode drop down control Band Low Shelf Band High Shelf This drop down list has three options to choose from Low shelf Band and High shelf Mode Description Low shelf The low shelf setting attenuates cuts or boosts frequencies by the amount you specify below the low shelf cutoff frequency This setting may also function as a high pass filter when you increase the rolloff control Band The band setting affects the center frequency by attenuating or boosting the frequency range around it The frequency range that is affected is determined by the Bandwidth control s setting High shelf The high shelf setting attenuates or boosts frequencies by the amount you specify abov
247. ows Media Format ast D Render entire project IY Save project markers in media file CHP 3 gg Applying compression To ensure that the video plays back in sync we will set compression values 1 On the Save A sdialog click the Custom button The Custom Settings dialog appears Format PCM hy ct Attributes faa 00 Hz 16 bit Stereo x rames to Keep original frame size of 320 240 pad New width 8 to 4 096 pixels F20 g Sample rate l 44 100 X New height 8 to 4 096 pixels E D Bit depth j 16 E Compression Channels j Stereo X Full Frames Uncompressed 2 Click the Video tab then click the Compression button The Video Compression dialog appears 3 Set the compression to the following settings Compressor From the Compressor drop down list choose Cinepak i Cine ak Codec by Radius ance Codec by Radius E EZE Compression Quality 50 Set the key frame rate to 7 frames xa fl gt Configure About e Set the data rate to 125 KB sec M Key Frame Ever F frames pa 4 Click the OK button to set the video compression 5 Click the OK button on the Custom Settings dialog 6 Click the Save button on the Save A s dialog A status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro U pon completion of the render your new media file is ready for distribution and playback Status bar Note You may cancel the rendering process Cancel by click
248. peaker and microphone connect The mixer is then connected to the computer s sound card M ixers usually have pre amps built into them T his diagram does not show you an instrument or a physical preamplifier such as a rack mounted component The reason for this omission is because these types of setup vary widely based on your mixer instrument and pre amp type Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Mixer out Sound card out Sound card in gt Mixer in Setup with digital multitrack T his setup includes a digital multitrack recorder with an optional MIDI synchronization component U sually you would have a mixer microphone etc connected to these components For simplicity this diagram demonstrates that V egas Pro can be used in this type of environment A s mentioned earlier your particular setup may vary depending on your equipment Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Digital card MIDI card Pi Digital Sync in multitrack hs The dashed line indicates a an option if you are synching Vegas Pro to tape via a MIDI Time Code Meee RECORDING CHP 8 201 Arming the track for recording W hether you are recording into an empty track a selected event or a time selection you need to prepare the track for recording Click the A rm for Record button You must arm a track before any new data is created You
249. pple Edits button itz on the Toolbar 2 Click on the event to be cut if applicable Otherwise skip to step 3 To cut multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 99 3 Select your time range Ech 4 Cut the event to the clipboard by doing one of the following P ress th e ctrl X keys Copy A Ctrl C Faste Ctrl e Click the Cut button on the Toolbar Delete Delete From the Edit menu choose Cut Undo AI Clear Edit History The cut events and their time information are removed from the selected track s and placed on the clipboard Existing events in the selected track s are adjusted to occupy the space created by the cut Cutting time selection with ripple mode Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboard Existing events occurring after the time selection are moved forward in the project by the length of the time selection Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Existing events are e adjusted to occur sooner in the project 00 00 00 fa H h F F Cutting time and event selection with ripple mode Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboa
250. project Note that gets The value entered will determine the time one beat signature used by the ruler when its format is set to Measures and Beats For example if T Start all new projects with these settings the entered value is 4 then a quarter note gets one beat Check box Click the Start all new projects with these settings checkbox if your projects requirements do not change or you want consistent settings for future projects cancel Ase _ The following list describes how to work with the Ruler page To enter information click inside a field and type e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Project Properties dialog open Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Project Properties dialog Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Project Properties dialog CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 263y Using Vegas Pro preferences T he preference options are different from project properties T he distinction to remember is that Project properties are unique to each project while preferences affect and control how Vegas Pro works as an application A djusting preferences allow you to set Vegas Pro to optimally function with your equipment and process audio in a variety of ways Some of these options you will probably set up one time while others may be adjusted on a project basis A ny changes that you make to the preferences will remain s
251. r Custom Background color 3 From the shortcut menu choose the type of MIDI monitoring that Vegas Pro will display Once you have made your selection the Time Display window displays both the MIDI code being input or output and a status message Working with project properties Vegas Pro has many settings that you can use with a project Some settings are simply informational details about the project while others control how Vegas Pro will work and handle your project and its output If you have multiple projects Vegas Pro stores the settings used for each project so you do not need to alter settings when you open a different project saving you time The Project Properties dialog may be access three ways New Ctr From the File menu choose Properties aie a e Click the Project Properties Toolbar button aa a e Press the art Enter shortcut keys Save ds Properties h Alt E nter The Project Properties dialog has four tabs Summary Exit Altera A udio Video and Ruler to display a properties page click the desired tab Following Is an overview of each tab and its setting options CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 26p Using the Summary properties tab T his tab allows you to enter information about the project T hese tab fields may be left blank or if information exists you may change it at any time Field Description Project Properties E E Title Enter the name or title of the op
252. r stereo busses want in your project You may add up to 26 busses The busses appear in the Mixer Mapes Ol eebu fi Sample rate Choose a sample rate from the drop down sample rate Hz x list or enter your own rate The sample rate Bit depth 16 ki range is 2 000 Hz to 96 000 Hz Higher E R sample rates result in better quality sound C Program Files Sonic Found Vegas Browse gt ____butalso means larger audio files Free storage space in selected folder 796 6 Megabytes Bit depth Choose a bit depth from the drop down list A higher bit depth results in better quality sound but also means larger audio files Recorded files Displays the path where recorded audio is Start all new projects with these settings folder stored The Browse button allows you to select a new location to store ore Cancel o amy Free storage Displays the available disk space where space in recorded audio is stored selected folder Check box Click the Start all new projects with these settings check box if your projects requirements do not change or you want consistent settings for future projects The following list describes how to work with the A udio tab To enter information click inside a field and type e Pressthe key to move to a different field Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Project Properties dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Project Properti
253. rack Note Gate Track Compressor 2 Plug ins that have been added to the chain 4 Click the OK button to save the track s plug in chain and close the Plug in C hooser CHP 6 dialog WORKING WITH TRACKS 144 jp Adding plug ins via the Plug in Explorer window T he Plug in Explorer is a dockable window that allows you to view and choose plug ins that may be added to a track To add plug ins to tracks via the Plug in Explorer do the following 1 If the Plug in Explorer is not displayed press the shortcut keys or from the View menu choose Plug ins 2 On the Plug in Explorer window navigate to the Track folder and select the Fx folder Click and drag ee ins to desired track Jellal keek Sonic Foundry Track Compressor Sonic Foundry Track Dither BS Sonic Foundry Track EQ x Sonic Foundry Track Noize Gate SSS Explorer Edit Details Plug Ins ji ns 3 Click and drag a plug in to the track E Note You may add multiple plug ins at the same time when you click them while pressing the or keys and then dragging them to the desired track a 4 Confirm that the plug ins were added by clicking the Track FX button to view the Track FX dialog You may begin setting each plug in s controls or rearranging the plug in order P 2 Hiv Track Compressor 4 gt a pl WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 ssSssrooine 145 Arranging the plug in s chain order
254. rayed out on the Track View For more information see Muting a track on page 137 Before muting the track After muting the track Solo button T his button asits name implies isolates a track s events for playback while muting the other tracks events For more information see Soloing a track on page 137 Before applying Solo to the track After applying Solo to the track QUICK START CHP 2 39 Scribble Strip This area lets you label a track Simply double click in the strip and type the track s name Or right click anywhere in the Track List and choose Rename from the shortcut menu and then type the track s name If you do not see the Scribble Strip expand the track For more information see Changing track height on page 135 Scribble Strip ade AO 3g 0 Right click eg track to display i fr Duplicate Track ees pop up Vol 0 0 dB piii Pan Center Insert Audio Track Delete Volume fader CHP 2 This fader controls the track s loudness relative to the other tracks when it is played back Vegas Pro tracks are preset at 0 0 decibel dB U se this fader to emphasize or de emphasize a particular track A track s volume range Is inf to 12 dB To move the fader do the following 1 Place the mouse cursor on the fader 2 Press and hold the left mouse button 3 Move the fader left or right and release the mouse to reset to 0 0dB Note You may also move
255. rd Existing events occurring later than the time selection are moved forward by the length of the time selection O nly tracks containing selected events are affected by the ripple edit Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut a Existing events are adjusted to occur sooner in the project 00 00 10 pe A a F a hus This graphic is showing crossfades CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 0 Deleting events in ripple mode Deleting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks H owever this information is not placed on the clipboard Existing events are adjusted forward when information is deleted from a selected track To delete events do the following 1 Click the Ripple Edits button itz on the Toolbar 2 Click on the event to be cut if applicable Otherwise skip to step 3 To cut multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 3 Select your time range Ech 4 Delete the event s by doing one of the following Ctrl e Pressthe key ChE Ctrl From the Edit menu choose Delete mer Delete Undo All Deleting time selection with ripple mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection are moved forward in the project by the length of t
256. re current manual available on the Vegas Pro CD ROM The PDF manual contains information that was written during this manual s press time To view this manual you will need A dobe A crobat R eader also included on the Vegas Pro CD ROM Help on the web A dditional Vegas Pro help and information is available on the Sonic Foundry web site Choose Sonic Foundry on the Web from the Help menu to view a listing of web pages pertaining to Vegas Pro and Sonic Foundry If your browser is not already open Vegas Pro will automatically start it for you INTRODUCTION CHP 1 ag Overview Vegas Pro is designed to be an easy to use program with many tools that provide power and flexibility when creating and working with media files As you will learn many of the V egas Pro operations menu items and shortcut keys are common to other popular software applications Vegas Pro is a unique and powerful program that gives you tremendous flexibility The following sections are a graphical tour of the Vegas Pro work area Please take a moment to get familiar with the Vegas Pro interface M any of the procedures in this manual use terminology found in these sections Main window This isthe window that appears when you open Vegas Pro The work area is primarily three frames the Track List the Track View and the Window Docking A rea T he other parts of the interface are tools and features used while working with your project
257. reby the amplitude loudness of a sound is varied over time W hen varied slowly a tremolo effect occurs If the frequency of modulation is high many side frequencies are created which can strongly alter the timbre of a sound APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 286 SSS Analog W hen discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time see Quantization Attack T he attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack T his means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in avery short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack Audio Compression Manager ACM The A udio Compression M anager from M icrosoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for W indows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress wav files Bandwidth Refers to the EQ plug in that is built in Each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth will affect a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth Bea
258. recordings are stored Vegas Pro is a non destructive audio editing environment Events within your project are actually references to media source files located on a storage device such as a hard drive or CD ROM When you record into Vegas Pro the event appears on the Track View while its media source file is written to your hard drive By default Vegas Pro stores recorded media source files in the Vegas Pro program folder H owever you may specify where Vegas Pro writes and stores recorded media source files To change where recorded media source files are stored do the following 1 From the File menu choose Properties or press the shortcut keys T he Project Properties dialog will display New Ctrl w o Open Ctrl O wie ooo Close Ennes Copyright 5 ave Ctrl 45 Comments Save As f Properties h Alt E nter p I Start all new projects with these settings Cancel Apply Exit Alt F4 2 Click the Audio tab to display the projects audio properties Project Properties Ei EI Summan Sudio Video Ruler Number of sterea busses i Sample rate Hz r Bit depth 16 ka Recorded files folder C Program Files Sonic Foundry Vegas Browse Free storage space in selected folder 796 6 Megabytes Start all new projects with these settings cancel Ase _ Path where recorded media source files are written and stored Also available disk sp
259. reference Each event in your project will display their respective take names ait deli Ac sh ial Music bed ft WT Before preference After preference is enabled is enabled Note To disable this feature repeat steps 1 3 and uncheck the Show active take names in events check box a ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 1 0 6 Using the pitch shift Vegas Pro allows you to apply pitch shift to selected events A pitch shift is a way speed up or slow down the audio to modify its timbre or fit the audio into a certain length of time G enerally when you Increase an event s pitch it speeds up and the events overall length is shortened Conversely when you decrease an event s pitch it slows down and lengthens the event T he semitone range in Vegas Pro is 24 to 24 Twelve semitones equal one octave so you may increase or decrease an event up to two octaves Within a semitone isa finer pitch adjustment called cents One hundred cents equal on semitone so you have quite a range to finely adjust an event s pitch Increasing or decreasing cents affect the overall length of the event but in smaller increments Original event ____L_ el Event with pitch shift of 12 or one octave speeds up Event with pitch shift of 12 or one octave slows down To change an event s pitch shift do the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties T he
260. rformed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or Toolbar button will continue redoing undos in reverse order In addition you may redo the last edit by choosing it from the Edit menu it will be the second item on the menu Undo Move Evert Chri z Redo Paste Event s Chrl Shiftez Redo last edit Redoing a series of edits T he redo history may be viewed by clicking the down arrow to the right of the button on the Toolbar A drop down list will appear a scroll bar also appears if numerous redos are listed The top listed item is the most recent undo edit If you want to redo a specific edit that appears farther down the list all edits above it must be redone as well To redo a series of edits do the following 1 Click on the arrow to the right of the i button Scroll bar Redo 1 Action GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 mMM 7g Cl CHP 4 2 From the drop down list use the scroll bar to locate the last series item to redo Hover the mouse Te Move Evert pointer and drag Move Evert Split Event it down to select Split Evert Split Event a series of edits Split Eve a y Split Event Split Event Paste Event s Redo 1 Action Redo 5 Actions 3 Place the mouse pointer on the item that you want to redo Items above it will be selected automatically Click outside the drop down list to cancel redo 4 Click the last series item to redo it and all selected edits Vegas Pro will restore
261. roject 3 Type the project name in the File name field 4 Click the Copy all media with project check box if you want all the media copied into the same folder as the project Save as type Vegas Project veg I Copy all media with project 5 Click the Save button on the Save A s dialog Creating a copy of a project using Save As A fter you have been working with your project you may use the Save As command in the File menu to create a copy of the project T his option also allows you to rename the project or render it to a different file format Typically rendering to a different format means that the project is finished and ready for distribution ee Note You may use Save As from the File menu to save the project the first time The only difference from the previous procedure is that the Save As dialog includes other file formats SS SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 n a by To create a copy of the Vegas Pro project do the following 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save A s dialog appears File name Presentation Save as type Vegas Project veg x Cancel Template l 7 Custom Description I Copy all media with project I Render entire project IE Save project markers m media fe 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to store the project 3 Type a new name in the File name field 4 Click the Copy all media with project check box if you want all th
262. rop down list To render a Vegas Pro project to one of these formats do the following 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save A sdialog appears 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to save the rendered file 3 Type a new name in the File name field if necessary A In the Save as type drop down list choose Windows Media Format asf OF RealMedia G2 rm Save as type Vegas Project veg ASF Vegas Project veg RM Video for Windows avi Wave Microsoft waw Windows Media Audio ma Windows Media Format ast 5 If necessary select any applicable check boxes pg 217 6 Click the Save button A status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Pro U pon completion of the render your Vegas Pro project is ready for distribution and playback a Status bar Note You may cancel the rendering process Cancel by clicking the X button on the status bar button Aster a a CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 222 Using rendering format controls and templates For each file format to which you may render your project Vegas Pro allows you to choose from the templates that appear on the Save A s dialog s Template drop down list You may also save your own templates by clicking the Custom button H owever in most cases the templates provide the best results for rendering your projects Selected rendering format ese Exindows Mada Click the Cust
263. routing Using the Sound Mapper for stereo or mono recording A fter you have armed the track for recording you may choose whether the track will record the signal in stereo in mono from the left channel or in mono from the right channel Stereo is the default setting To select a recording method do the following 1 Click the A udio button aj left of the Record button to display a drop down list 2 From the drop down list select the recording method Stereo Left or Right CHP 8 RECORDING 202 SSS Assigning tracks to input devices A fter you have armed the track for recording you may select the device from which the track will record it signal Also you may choose whether the track will record the signal in stereo in mono from the left channel or in mono from the right channel W hichever device and recording option you select Vegas Pro will display the selection on the track s toolbar a Bi g a a F AS aoe 2L O i Left channel is amry a FS a elle 3 Be ce Dg Right channel To select an input device and recording method do the following 1 Click the A udio button m left of the Record button to display a drop down list 2 From the drop down list select the input device and recording method Stereo Left or Right 1 Sound Card 1 a EA a 2 Sound Card 2 2 30 Ae 3 Sound Card 3 4 Sound Card 4 5 Sound Card 5 Stereo Left Bight RE
264. rtcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Delete Or from the Edit menu choose Delete Playing back the project Vegas Pro allows you to play back your project in two ways directly within Vegas Pro or by mixing the entire project to a preview file Play back within Vegas Pro Vegas Pro has a Transport bar that allows you to play back your entire project or portions of your project based on a either a time selection or current cursor position Only non muted tracks and events are played back Loop Play from Stop Cursor Skip cursor play cursor pos to end forward GRPPW EH ANXND Record Ploy from BIN Cursor Skip cursor start to start backward QUICK START CHP 2 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSMMreoeoos ag CHP 2 If your project includes video make sure the Video Preview window is displayed for playback from the View menu choose Video Preview or press the Alt 6 keys Play back entire project 1 Press the K button to position the cursor at the beginning of the project 2 Press the button to start playback Or press the im button to begin playback at the beginning of the project 3 Press the button to stop playback Play back a time selection 1 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the M arker bar T he mouse arrow includes a left right arrow Ts 2 Click and drag to select the time region To increase or decrease the time selection click and drag its start and end points 3 Press the b
265. rtup Show active take name in events Draw waveforms in events Animate video ruler Number video frames Prompt to keep files after recording Create Undos for FX parameter changes Recently used project list Always prompt to save new files with Scott chunk Always launch Send after saving Scott files Choose Language exited with the project still open When enabled the Vegas Pro logo will appear when you start the program When enabled a tip for using Vegas Pro will appear on each startup When enabled each event that you place in your project will have its active take name displayed on it When enabled each event in your project will graphically display the audio s waveform When enabled video on the video ruler will change as the cursor travels along the timeline When enabled video on the video ruler will display each frame s number When enabled Vegas Pro will prompt you to delete or keep audio after it has been recorded When enabled allows you to undo any changes made to Assignable FX in your project When enabled the Vegas Pro File menu will display this setting s number of last used project files When enabled Vegas Pro will display the Scott Studios Information dialog when you save a new file or click the Save As button This options allows you to embed and Scott Studio command markers that you placed in your project pg 86 When enabled Vegas Pro will start the Scott Studios Send application after you
266. s Description Keys Description Keys Move selected event s one Right arrow Move selected event s down one Down arrow pixel number pad track number pad Move selected event s one Left arrow Move selected event s right on grid Ctrl Right arrow pixel number pad number pad Move selected event s up Up arrow Move selected event s left on grid Ctrl Left arrow one track number pad number pad INTRODUCTION CHP 1 mMM 27 CHP 1 Track view commands T hese commands refer to editing functions related to the tracks in your project Description Keys Description Keys New audio track Ctrl Q Group selected events Goo Enable disable snapping F8 Mark in point I or Snap to markers Shift F8 Mark out point Oor Snap to grid Ctrl F8 Insert Remove track volume envelope V Ripple edit mode Ctrl L Insert Remove track panning envelope P Auto crossfade mode X Insert Region R Edit tool selection D Insert Marker M Normal edit tool Ctrl D Insert Command Marker C New audio track Ctrl Q Group selected events G View commands T hese commands refer to magnification of tracks and the events contained on them Description Keys Description Keys Increase track height Ctrl Shift Up Zoom out large increments or Ctrl Down arrow arrow selection if one exists Decrease track height Ctrl Shift Down Zoom in large increments or Ctrl Up arrow arrow selection if one exists Zoom in time incremental Up arrow Zoom in vertically Shift
267. s Pro displays both the time in the event when the volume will be maximized and its decibel level Fade ins Fade out Volume line Volume line n at 00 00 02 272 is 0 0 dB Time and decibel Time and decibel 3 Release the mouse to set the fade in or out Changing the event s fade curve You can set the fade curve fast linear or slow that an event uses to raise or lower the volume over time Fade in curves Fade out curves Fast gt Linear a Sow gt T here are two ways to access the fade curve types You may right click anywhere In the event s fade in or out region to display a shortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Fade type to display the fade types sub menu Click the desired fade type to set it T he second way isto go directly to the fade types sub menu W hen the envelope cursor 4 is displayed right click to display the sub menu Click the desired fade type to set it Right click in region Right click with envelope cursor showing ade Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctrl E Cut Ctrl Copy Ctrl C ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 115 Crossfading events Vegas Pro allows you to crossfade between two events on the same track C rossfading gives you the ability to fade out one event s volume while another event s volume is fading in on the same track T his function allows you to introduce transitions between event
268. s Pro will notify you of a sharing violation Save and close the open project before deleting these project items To delete a media file or folder do the following 1 Select a media file or folder in the Tree View or Contents List pane To select multiple files hold down either the or keys 2 Click the Delete X button T he Confirm Delete dialog will appear Or you may right click on the selected media file or folder to display a shortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Delete T he Confirm File Delete dialog will appear Pe Eola Tutorial way Confirm File Delete x Add to My Favorites eS Rename p Dete A A Are you sure you want to send DeltaSFxP way to the Recycle Bin Rename oy 3 Click the Yes button to delete the media file or folder Click the No button to keep the media file or folder on your storage device 4 Type the new name for the media file or folder and press the key to save the name ee Note If the media file or folder that you deleted is being used in a project Vegas Pro will prompt you to set the new path where the project s media file s reside ps 4 E Music Delta wav This file could not be found in the specified folder It may be on the Vegas CD ROM Would you like to look in a new location for this file i No No toall Cancel CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 250 gt SS Adding folders to Vegas Pro Favorites Vegas Pro includes a Favorites folder found in the
269. s appl Unlocking an event 1 Click the locked event s 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch to display the sub menu T he Lock switch will havea check mark 3 From the sub menu choose Lock to disable it on the selected event s B II Note You may also access the event s properties and deselect the Lock check box N CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 91 0 Looping an event You may loop an event so that you can extend it along the timeline by dragging the right edge of the event Loop may be applied to one or more selected events W hen you switch an event to loop the Switch sub menu displays a check mark indicating that Loop is enabled T he event will remain looped until you disable the switch To loop an event to do the following 1 Click on the event to be looped To loop multiple events use the key the Shift key or the Selection Edit tool F to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch and then Loop from the sub menu Selected event Selected event after before loop loop is applied ag the right edge to extend the event Unlooping an event 1 Click the looped event s 2 From the Edit menu choose Switch to display the sub menu T he Loop switch will havea check mark 3 From the sub menu choose Loop to disable it on the selected event s T he original waveform Is restored ee lt lt Note You may also access the eve
270. s eliminated You may also reset the clip from the shortcut menu when you right click on either A ssignable FX s meter M oreover you may set the meter to hold the signal level s peaks and valleys Click the clipping Clipping signal indicator to reset Adjusted fader with dB value the meter and Reset meter Right click to reset the clip change meter resolution and set the meter to hold peaks and valleys 12 to 0 dB st 24 to 0 dB 42 to 0 dB B to 0 dE oo eto O dB 90 to O dE w Show Labels Hold Peaks w Hold Valleys Muting an Assignable FX T he M ute button appears on both the A ssignable FX control and its dialog T his button enables you to temporarily disable playback of the A ssignable FX W hen an A ssignable FX is muted it appears grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of the meter You may mute more than one A ssignable FX at a time To mute the A ssignable FX simply click the M ute button on either the control or dialog Click it again to unmute the A ssignable FX XS 00 0 0 00 00 00 uted Assignable FX USING THE MIXER CHP 7 195 Soloing an Assignable FX The Solo button appears on both the A ssignable FX control and its dialog This Assignable FX button isolates the control s playback and mutes the other A ssignable FX and tracks that are assigned to them so you can focus on a specific output W hen you solo an Assign
271. s is selected Vegas Pro will continue to play for a specified period of time without chasing if time code is lost for some reason Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent lossesin time code monitoring If losses in time code are frequent troubleshooting should be done on your hardware to find the cause of the problem T he Free wheel slack time field specifies the amount of time that time code can be lost before the Free wheel playback time starts A longer time is more tolerant of loses in the incoming time code T he Free wheel playback time field specifies the amount of time that V egas Pro will play back after the Free wheel slack time has been exceeded T he Sychronization delay time field specifies the amount of time required for V egas Pro to synchronize itself to incoming time code On slower computers this time should be set to around two seconds On faster computers it may be set lower H owever setting this value too low can sometimes result in audible pitch shifting at the start of playback CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 278 jp MTC Output T his tab contains controls for MTC output It is displayed only if a device is selected for MTC input on the Sync tab MTC Input MTC Output MIDI Clock Output Internal timer resolution milliseconds 4 Full frame message generation Never C On start and stop of playback and record For all cursor postion changes cence Ase _ T he following list de
272. s on a track W hen you place an event into your project Vegas Pro adds handles that are used to set the crossfade T hese handles allow you to adjust the crossfade even when you are using automatic crossfades Volume lines also appear indicating how and when the events volume are being affected A Iso their respective waveforms will graphically display how the crossfade volume is affected Drag handle gt _ _P G i Fade in volume line Handles Fade out volume line Automatic crossfades On the Toolbar the A utomatic C rossfade button ta allows you to overlap event edges and Vegas Pro will apply a crossfade for you Simply click i the button or press the short cut key to enable or disable A utomatic C rossfades Events before crossfade Events after crossfade 7 Drag the event to a E overlap the other S T he crossfade x will automatically adjust itself as you move one event over another aslong as one event s edge is crossing the other event s edge In the case where edges do not cross one event is wholly contained in another the shorter event will be place on top of the longer event You may still set a crossfade in this situation For more information see Manually setting a crossfade on page 116 U se the event s handles to adjust the desired crossfade between the two events CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 16 Manually setting a crossfade If you are u
273. s the first track 3 Press the key and click the video event and the three voice over events to select them EN BE Undo Create Event Group Chl 2 00 00 05 Switches 00 00 10 Take CI Select All Cie Wee 4 From the Edit menu choose Group and then Create New or press the a key to group the events N ext we will place a new audio file to serve as a music bed for the video and add a volume envelope CHP 3 TUTORIAL 8 Working with the music bed W ewill place an event that will play for the entire video W e will add a volume envelope to lower the volume while the narrator speaks and then increase the volume again for the remainder of the video Placing the music bed 1 Press the ctri Homd key to move the cursor to the beginning of the project 2 In the media list double click the M usic bed file to place it at the start of the project 3 Pressthe button to play the project Adding a volume envelope T he music bed s volume needs to be lowered as the narrator speaks A volume envelope will automatically lower the volume and then raise it again when the narrator finishes speaking W ewill use the voice over s starting and ending points as a reference for the envelope 1 Select the music bed track or event 2 From the Insert Menu choose Audio Envelopes and then choose Volume A blue line appears across the track Assignable Fx Hemare Aestqnenle Re Audio Tra
274. scribes how to work with the MTC Output tab e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the A dvanced Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the A dvanced Preferences dialog and return to the Sync tab e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and return to the Sync tab Internal timer resolution milliseconds 4 W hen the Use internal timer for MTC generation check box is enabled the MIDI Time Code that Vegas Pro generates will be based off of you computer s C entral Processing U nit C PU clock Otherwise Vegas Pro will generate MTC based on the sound card s clock T he Internal timer resolution field allows you to control MTC resolution higher values indicate lower resolution and vice versa CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 Full frame message generation Never On start and stop of playback and record For all cursor postion changes W hen the Sync tab s Generate MIDI Time Code is used the Full frame message generation radio button list specifies when Vegas Pro will send full frame time code messages Full frame messages are used by some external audio synchronizers to seek a proper location prior to synchronization For example tape based recorders benefit from seeking to full frame messages because of the time required to move the transport to the proper location H owever full frame messages are ignored by some devices
275. ser dialog Drag and drop the plug in to a new location in the chain e Select the plug in and click either the left or right move button 4H Hh co Reverb Graphic EG HNoise Reduction gt s E hift Plug In Right Hit H of Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG H k hitt Plug In Left 3 Once you get the desired chain order click the OK button to save it and close the Plug in Chooser dialog Bypassing plug ins on the chain You may bypass a plug in on the chain by clicking its check box or right clicking the plug in to display a shortcut menu and choosing Bypass T he plug in will remain bypassed until you enable it again Bypassing a plug in prevents its processing on the signal You may bypass plug ins either from the Bus FX dialog or the Plug in C hooser dialog Effect enabled Effect bypassed I Noise Reduction Move Lett Move Fight To enable the plug in again click its check box or choose Bypass from the shortcut menu Remove Noise Reduction Reverb Graphic EG USING THE MIXER CHP 7 185 Deleting plug ins from the bus chain A fter you have created bus plug in chains you may remove any of the plug ins from the chain at any time You may remove bus plug ins from the Bus FX dialog of the Plug in Chooser dialog Deleting plug ins from the Bus FX dialog To delete a plug in from the chain do the following 1 Click on the Bus FX button 2 The Bus FX dialog appears I
276. set too high you may eliminate material intended to be output Attack time control Attack time 0 to 500 ms 3 HIH This control determines how quickly the N oise G ate plug in opens when the signal rises above the threshold level W e recommend setting the attack time to a smaller value to achieve the best results If the attack time is too slow the beginning of wanted signal may be cutoff because the volume is rising too slowly Release time control Release time 1 to 5 000 ma 100 HH This control determines how quickly the N oise G ate plug in closes when the signal falls below the threshold level W e recommend setting the release time to a larger value Larger values cause the signal to sound more natural while it decays fades If the release time is too fast the end of wanted signals may be cutoff because the volume fades too quickly CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 158 pS Using the Dither plug in T he Dither plug in is best used at the last stage when processing a signal from a higher bit depth to a lower one We recommend using the Dither plug in as a Bus FX rather than a Track FX For more information see Adding plug in chains to busses on page 181 T he Dither plug in adds a low level random noise to the signal T his added noise is used to mask more obtrusive noise caused by quantization Quantization noise is the inherent distortion that Is added to a signal due to digital processing In addition the
277. sing automatic crossfades V egas Pro will not insert a crossfade if a shorter event is placed on top and within the same time of a longer event In this case during play back the longer event will begin playing then the shorter event will play and then the longer event will resume playing at the timeline position To manually set the a crossfade between the edges of the overlapping events do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on one of the shorter event s handles T he envelope cursor will appear 4 2 When you see the envelope cursor appear 4 click and drag the handle to the desired position Events without crossfade Events with manual crossfade 3 Repeat Step 1 2 to set the second crossfade if necessary or to edit the crossfade Changing crossfade curves You can set the crossfade curve s that Vegas Pro uses to fade in and out between two events T he crossfade curve determines how Vegas Pro raises and lowers the events volume over time Fast in Fast in Linear in Slow out Fast out Slow out Linear in Slow in Fast in Linear out Slow out Linear out Slow in Linear in Slow in Fast out E E ea Fast out H Linear out You may change the crossfade curve by doing the following 1 Right click anywhere in the crossfade region to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Fade type to display the fade types sub menu ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5
278. sound file To visually see if you have a DC offset present you can zoom all the way into a sound file and see if it appears to be floating over the center line lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 288 p ____ Decibel dB A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 W here did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equation dB 20 x log V 1 V 2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In Vegas Pro most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB Device Driver A program that enables W indows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by W indows software to control sound card recording and playback Digital Signal Processing DSP A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah
279. ss CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 281 i esta Troubleshooting sA 5 gt i vat a Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working correctly Vegas Pro is a non destructive time based editor Asa result there are certain types of DirectX Plug ins that perform poorly in Vegas Pro asA ssignable FX or Bus FX T hese types of plug ins are roughly classified as any plug in that outputs a different amount of time than what goesin T his includes all plug ins like time compress expand gapper snipper and pitch shift without preserving duration H owever these types of FX plug ins may perform suitably as Bus FX but only if one bus is used in the project In addition plug ins that require a lot of pre buffering will also perform poorly such as Sonic Foundry A coustic M irror when using long impulse files Why do hear gaps in my audio playback T here are many reasons that your audio playback can gap Playing back more simultaneous tracks than your hard drives can handle e Running out of physical RAM can cause W indows to start using virtual memory e Running too many DirectX plug ins can use up all your computer s power e Having sound card driver problems can cause play back gapping Below are a things you can check and do to make sure your system is optimized to prevent gapping APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 282 gt _ RAM usage meter Ifthe RAM usage meter at the bottom of the Vegas Pro Track View indicates
280. st playback speed by setting the Speed Control M arker located beneath the Scrub control Click and oie either forward Rate 0 0000 Set play back speed INTRODUCTION CHP 1 28 Window Docking Area This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are working with a project To dock a window simply drag and drop it to the Docking A rea This area has three regions in which a window can be placed right middle and left Asa result the Docking A rea can display up to three windows at a time W hen windows are docked they will either be displayed on top of the other windows or each window s tab will appear above the task bar Simply click the window s tab to bring it to the top One window display apria N D ND A pA LAs eA Video Preview Mixer Explorer Trimmer Record Time 00 00 RAM 017MB 128M8 Disk 00 CPU 00 Two window display a E LED cae AES ii Eii Video Pievio Mixer Record Time 00 00 RAM O17MB 128MB Disk 00 CPU 00 4 a gt na NAND Explorer Trimmer These windows are fully scalable to suit your needs Three window display i 18 TSE Click a window s tab to A gt gt ws ie 0n 00 a 3 bring it to the top Explorer Trimmer Record Time 0000 AAM OT7MBAZENB Disk O02 CPU ox Explorer window The Explorer window works similarly to the W indows 9x and NT file management Explorer inclu
281. surements are rounded to discrete values Specifically with respect to audio quantization is a function of the analog to digital conversion process The continuous variation of the voltages of a analog audio signal are quantized to discrete amplitude values represented by digital binary numbers T he number of bits available to describe these values determines the resolution or accuracy of quantization For example if you have 8 bit analog to digital converters the varying analog voltage must be quantized to 1 of 256 discrete values a 16 bit converter has 65 536 values Quantization Noise A result of describing an analog signal in discrete digital terms see Quantization This noise is most easily heard in low resolution digital sounds that have low bit depths and is similar to a shhhhh type sound while the audio is playing It becomes more apparent when the signal is at low levels such as when doing a fade out Region A subsection of a sound file denoted by a start and end point You can define any number of regionsin a sound file lt CHP gt lt C H P gt APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 294 p _ Resample T he act of recalculating samplesin asound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If an audio file is resampled at a lower rate Vegas Pro decreases sample points As a result the file size and the frequency range are reduced Resampling to a higher sample rate Vegas Pro will interpolat
282. t Enabling this feature will resample the audio data prior to ode E passing it to the audio compressor It is used when the Meee source material may contain odd sample rates or a SCE known source sample rate improves the audio quality of 2 the compressed output p PE M Resample audio prior to encode Resample rate l 44 100 p ee ee Se Resample rate 5 Click the Next button to choose a Resample rate from the drop down list 6 Click the Next button to choose a the video type for encoding Encoding Template Wizard m Video size width x height C CIF 352x288 MPEG 4 Fractal small 176x144 C Presentation small 160x120 Animation 320x240 C Small 4 3 aspect ratio television 176x132 Small 16 9 aspect ratio letterbox 192x112 Smoothest motion video Sharpest image video Slide show C Custom New width 6 ta 1024 iiFrom source file EN Frame size 7 Click the Next button to select a video frame size 8 Click the Finish button to save the template and return to the Edit Template dialog Edit Template BE mono audio content Use this setting to encode a single bandwidth that supports client connections over modems P You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list clicking the Edit button starting the wizard again and making your setting changes a l Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list
283. t de aE Normalize Peak Sets the maximum level that RE i Location of prefered audio editor Level dB Vegas Pro will use when C Program Files S ound Forge forges2 EXE Browse normalizing an event Location of Displays the path of the audio Ad d Default Al Preferred Audio editor that you can start Eo er Editor directly from Vegas Pro to perform destructive edits to Ok Cancel a Apply ae LK caret are T he following list describes how to work with the Routing tab e Click the Browse button to change the sound editor program For more information see Setting up the sound editor program on page 90 e Click the Advanced button to set other A udio preferences For more information see Setting advanced audio preferences on page 274 e Click the Default All button to return the A udio tab to its default settings e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Preferences dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Preferences dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Preferences dialog Adjusting the Playback Buffering slider You can specify how much memory is used by Vegas Pro when playing back your project T his preference is useful but must be carefully adjusted If you set the buffer size too high you may experience gapping during playback Conversely if you set the buffer size too low you may experience gapping as well becaus
284. tains the narrator s cough and split it from the audio then delete the cough 1 On the timeline click and drag to make a time selection where the cough occurs 2 Press the button to play back the error to ensure that your time selection does not include part of the voice over that we need 3 Increase or decrease the time selection by clicking and dragging an edge of the selection 4 Once the time selection is made choose Split from the Edit menu or press the s key to solit the event T Add Marker Ctri Z Fant gedo TehlFShitt Tool One event Three events before the split Undo AII after the split Clear Edit History TUTORIAL BG pS Editing an event W ehave the cough as a new event that can now be deleted 1 Click the event with the cough 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete or press the key to remove the cough event A fter the edits have been made the voice over should look something like this Welcome to Sonic This tutorial will introduce found in this Foundry Vegas you to the powerful editing new production and post production features environment Aligning the remaining voice over events W ith the voice over edited we need to align the remaining audio to the video W hen you move events they snap to other event edges You may extend or shorten an event s length by clicking and dragging its edges which is useful for fine tuning the alignment M oreover you ma
285. te Data rate Compression T Start all new T he following list describes how to work with the Video tab E 4 Tutorial Tutorial av sJ20K240n24 173 Frames 15 000 J22 KB S5ec Cinepak Codec by Radius projects with these settings Carcel dee e Click the Override active video frame rate check box and enter a different frame rate e Click the Apply button to save information but keep the Project Properties dialog open e Click the OK button or press the key to save the information and close the Project Properties dialog e Click the Cancel button to keep original settings and close the Project Properties dialog CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO CHP 10 267 Using the Ruler properties tab This tab allows you to set ruler settings used in your project You may also change ruler settings on the Tack View For more information see Changing the Ruler settings on page 253 Item Description Project Properties Ea ES Ruler time Choose a ruler time format from the drop Smee aren ween eer format down list Ruler start time Enter a value that the ruler will use at the Pae a Time gl beginning of your project This feature is Fiuler start time 00 00 00 000 useful for sychronization purposes Beats per minute tempo 20 000 Beats per Enter the desired number of beats per minute Bede wer meae Po B minute tempo for the project a a Beats per Enter the desired number of beats to occur measure per measure for the
286. te Vegas Pro has one template from which you may create your own display options The A II fields display isthe Vegas Pro preset W henever you rearrange or delete a column you will see Untitled appear in the template drop down list T his area is where you will enter aname for your custom display Creating your custom display To create your custom display do the following 1 2 From the Show drop down list choose the category that you want to customize Click and drag a column s header to the new position You will see thisicon R as you move the column S a Note If you want to remove the column so that it will not display drag the icon off the Edit Details window eK Release the mouse to drop the column in its new position 4 Repeat steps 2 3 to move more columns in the selected category 5 Enter a name in the template drop down CHP 5 Edit Details Show Events hy Custom Display Ea Click the g button on the Edit Details window to save the custom display You may delete a custom display by selecting it from the template drop down list and clicking the button lt aaaea l Note If you want to add a column that you deleted for a custom view you need to create a new view from the All Fields template Eee EN ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 131 CHAPTER eee Working with h os 6 Tracks 5 b k a ni Ti z e w en ae
287. te or sampling frequency isthe number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz H owever more storage space is required when using higher sample rates Sample Size See Bit Depth GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B 295 Sample Value The sample value also referred to as sample amplitude isthe number stored by a single sample In 16 bit audio these values range from 32768 to 32767 In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 dB Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu which appears when you click on certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in Vegas Pro for quick access to many commands An example of a shortcut menu can be found by right clicking on any waveform display in a data window Sign Bit Data that has positive and negative values and uses zero to represent silence Unlike the Signed format two s complement is not used Instead negative values are represented by setting the highest bit of the binary number to one without complementing all other bits Thisisa format option when opening and saving RAW sound files Signal to N
288. that can be used to access different functions within your project In addition this window is where you can adjust the outgoing signal s volume setting and routing Viewing the Mixer window The Mixer window is preset to appear in the Windows Docking Area when you first start Vegas However you may move the Mixer within the workspace at any time For more information see Docking a window on page 244 To hide view the Mixer window choose Mixer from the View menu Or use the Mixer window s shortcut keys Alt 3 to hide or view the window Toolbar Mizer e R OY Cow i 44 100 Hz 16 bit Preview Well 7 Toolbar w Status Bar w Explorer Alt w Trimmer Alt 2 w Edit Details Alt 4 w Plug Ins Alt 5 7 Video Preview Alt 6 L Preview Busses in project Assignable FX in project CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 170 Using the Mixer tool bar T he M ixer s toolbar allows you to access project properties switch your project between mono to stereo output and add Assignable FX controls to the M ixer Properties Assignable FX at a fs Stereo Mono Button Description re The properties button accesses the project properties dialog pg 263 fm This toggle button allows you to switch your project s output to a stereo or mono signal i The Assignable FX button allows you to quickly access the FX Plug in Chooser dialog This dialog allows you to add Assignable FX controls to which pr
289. that most of your physical RA M isin use you could be gapping because W indows virtual memory is being used Virtual memory is a method used by W indows to write information to your hard drive to make room in physical RAM T his process uses a lot of your computer s resources o Mixer Video Preview ee Record Time 01 10 40 CRAM 27MB 128MB eos RAM usage meter CDM 10 14AM To minimize the amount of RAM that you are using try the following 1 Exit all background applications not in use 2 A djust the playback buffering slider on the Preferences A udio tab Options Preferences HE Enable Snapping Fa gnap lio Brid Etrit Eg Step G Methers Sinica Playback buffering seconds c Fei ir General Routing Audio Syne M Automatically fade edit edges Imel ho B Normalize peak level dB o dE Location of prefered audio editor C Program Files Sound Forge forges EXE Browse A djust this slider as low as possible but setting it too low will cause gaps as well 3 Run fewer events simultaneously by muting or soloing them 4 A dd more RA M to your computer H owever after 128 M B the performance increase that you get will start to decline Disk meter Ifthe Disk meter at the bottom of the Track View ever bounces near or above 50 you will probably experience gapping T his issue is due to the data not being read off the hard drive fast enough s Miner Video Preview Record Time 01 70 4
290. the Plug in Explorer window In addition the chain will be added to either the bus or A ssignable FX for which you created it Creating presets from existing plug in chains You may save plug in chains that are being used in a project as presets If you use a combination of plug ins often saving them in a preset will save you time when editing a project T he preset chains that you save retains the order of plug ins and the settings that you have applied A fter the preset chain is save it may be applied to a bus or an Assignable FX To save an existing plug in chain as a preset do the following 1 Click an existing Bus or Assignable FX button 2 and then on the respective Edit Plug in Chain button a to display the Plug in Chooser dialog 2 Once the Plug in Chooser dialog is displaying with the plug ins on the chain area click the Save As button T he Save plug in chain dialog will appear Save plug in chain az H EW MusicPreset ma 3 Enter a name that you want to use for the preset 4 Click the OK button or press the key to save the preset CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 498 y_i Editing preset plug in chains You may add delete and rearrange plug in on preset chains at any time Editing is preformed on the Plug in Chooser dialog To edit a preset plug in chain do the following 1 From the bus or A ssignable FX control click either the control s FX button 2 to display their FX dialog 2 From the
291. the fader by clicking it and using the right or left arrow keys on the keyboard a ae QUICK START 40 Multipurpose slider If you do not see this slider expand the track T his slider controls the track s stereo panning and auxiliary bus volume You may select what the slider controls by clicking its label Each item s slider position Is independent from the others Aus Inf Au B nk Click label a to view menu Panning Vegas Pro tracks are preset to center the signal M ove the slider to adjust the signal s output left or right A s you move the slider Vegas Pro displays the signal s percentage going to either the left or right channel For example moving the slider to 60 L means that 60 percent of the signal is mixed to the left channel while 40 percent is mixed to the right For more information see Adding a panning envelope on page 164 Pan ee Te enter a pale fase TE the e to reset to Center Auxiliary bus Vegas Pro projects that have multiple busses enable you to send track signals to primary and secondary auxiliary busses T he primary bus is set using the Bus button A on a track For more information see Bus assignment on page 37 The auxiliary bus sends signal to a separate bus independent of the primary bus without affecting the project s overall playback TECE O LENT Ve vi i ei H O a EGER 2 B o anst j N en u RAe Ae r ENE 7 ENA Here EE SURED Double click the slider
292. the previously created chain that isshowing in the chain area Sissi Track EG Track Compressor Track Noise Gate o 3 Click the Save As button T he Save plug in chain as dialog will appear Save plug in chain az E Ei MusicPreset r cancel _ 4 Enter aname that you want to use for the preset 5 Click the OK button or press the key to save the plug in chain as a preset WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 ag Vegas Pro plug in reference Vegas Pro includes four built in plug ins that you can add to your project Equalization EQ Compression N oise Gate and Dither Each plug in has its own control settings than determine how a track is processed for final output The tracksin your project that use the same plug in may be set independently of each other For example if you are applying Compression to Track 1 and Track 2 each track can have different compression settings T he following sections describe each plug in and how they affect the track Using the Equalization EQ plug in This plug in functions as a parametric equalizer an equalizer with parameter controls Thistype of EQ gives you more control over the track s frequencies range W hen this plug in is added to a track it allows you to affect the track in a four frequency range Each band can be configured to control its bandwidth rolloff and whether it operates as a peak or shelving filter with full gain volume control U sing these controls t
293. their events are unaffected when you mix to a single track Typically you would use this feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them Also when you mix multiple tracks to a single stereo track any envelope or track effects that you applied will be rendered into the newly mixed down track This option allows you to destructively process any plug ins that you want to commit To mix multiple tracks to a single stereo track do the following 1 To mix specific events make a time selection Otherwise skip to step 2 2 From the Tools Menu choose Mix to New Track or press the shortcut keys The CHP 6 M ix to N ew Track dialog will appear Toole Mis To New Track Ctrl hM Mis To Preview Ctrl Shift h Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E ile name New Track way Save as type Wave Microsoft wav Template Description ingle Stereo I Render entire project The Mix to New Track dialog has settings that you can apply to the newly mixed track e From the Save in drop down list select the drive or folder to save the new media file e Type anew media file in the File name field Save as type Wave Microsoft way be AIFF aif h File name From the Save as type drop down list choose the file format wav is the preset e From the Template drop down list choose an audio format from the template list Template Proj
294. then Create New e Press the G shortcut key to create the group If you want to add eventsto an existing group simply select the events and the group and repeat the above steps e e O Note Events can only be in one group at a time Adding an event to an existing group essentially deletes the old group and creates a new one to include all of the selected events E ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 119 Removing an event from a group You may remove a single event from a group The other grouped events will not be affected when you remove an event from the group A Iso the event you are removing from the group is not deleted from the project but remains at its timeline position To remove an event from the group do the following 1 On the event you want to remove from the group right click to display a shortcut menu F Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Take l CrealeNew G Clear O 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and then choose Remove From on the sub menu The event will be removed from the group but keep the rest of the grouped events intact 3 Repeat Steps 1 2 to remove more events from the group Clearing a group You may ungroup events by clearing the group C learing a group does not delete or remove events from your project The events will remain at their timeline position To clear a group do the following 1 Select one of the grouped events The entire group will be selected
295. tierra dee kd hed bateaetesteaetaut hea a ede 15 Registering via the telephone 00 cece eee eee eee 16 Using the online help nnan ccc eee ee 17 Accessing Nel 22 wat mot oh pie e it ee hein Odea Reed te eee eee ees 17 CON CI WIGWY e uane a EAS ed Wid eel de E ra ere ae ae ck ae te a 19 MAN WWI GOW a et bso Ls oe OR eee dees e awe ee eee eee nee eects A 19 Hi Koo aro ageete eee meee emg mre aa Oe AmnE pom E E geese aera E S eee ee eRe 20 1 aip E _ ___itare _ Marker Dar are sare deed eaaa nee weed aaa aaa ean aa a wet ed 20 RUIGE S22 Ate sees nates eae Sad oe Se a ee ee ee ee ed Me we ee Sees 21 TN MNS ee 5 taba EE te age EEE care ane mane eel eee tei Re ean 2a 21 Track VIEW 2i2 2 2 ind ad Fg et ase ashe Sate ytd eh tech eed Sete ee eee enee seein meee ai ana 22 Transpor Dak CONUUOISs 64 20504 sewer deeded bot tetote bode bees 22 SCD COM UNO lets aca ode epsre sas a ae E a ae ere ee te ts eta Se eee 22 Window Docking Area sisisi 4444 6A Sias dae din Si pW we ee owe we eee 23 Keyboard command reference 000 ee eee ees 25 Signal HOW soda teedn Hee e aot dees seer teed de a 28 QUICK AN Ea era ei Behr are cs teak eae eh a eas Red A ee eset 29 MENI a ogra ae eg RR nee ee ee 29 What type of media Can you use eee ee eee eens 29 Starling Aproaerema aT aea a a T ewe ewe rs 30 Finding media files tO USe iia nannan annn naan n nnmn 30 Previewing a media file nnuaua svete sansa deeds bi
296. timeline its edge will automatically align to designated snap points L A Il i Snap points Using the event snap offset Each event in your project has a snap offset flag that can be moved along the length of the event The flag is the white triangle that is located in the lower left corner of each event in your project T his flag allows you to designate where in the event snapping will occur ho br The time display reflects Snap offset fla i L time within the event not p g Snap offset 0 000 Shap offset 50 000 the project Ruler CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING To set the snap offset do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the snap offset triangle The pointer turns into a hand ih 2 Click and drag the snap offset flag to the new position in the event Asthe flag is moved you will see a time display appear T his time display indicates where the snap offset flag occurs in time in the event 3 Release the mouse to set the snap offset flag Snapping to grid lines Vegas Pro allows you to specify what type of grid you want to use in your project The grid lines that appear can then be used as snapping points for events and markers Enabling disabling snapping to grid You may enable and disable grid snapping by choosing Snap to grid from the Options menu or by pressing the keys W hen the grid is disabled for snapping it will still be visible for reference H owever unlike a snap enabled grid it
297. ting 209 Adding empty tracks 131 AIFF bit rate 223 channels 224 rendering 219 sample rate 223 saving a template 224 templates 223 A rmingtracksto record 38 201 ASR See Envelopes A signable FX 186 195 adding via Plug in Chooser 187 adding via Plug in Explorer 188 adjusting for clipping 194 assigning track to 140 bypassing plug ins 190 changing plug in order 189 control 186 deleting 191 meter resolution 193 muting 194 naming renaming 195 routing to busses 192 send 40 soloing 195 tracks See Track FX volume adjustment 140 A udio editing 93 129 B A udio files See Events A udio preferences 272 advanced control settings 274 controls 272 274 A udio property settings 265 A uxiliary bus 40 track assignment 138 volume adjustment 139 AV bit depth 233 channels 234 format 233 frame rate 234 frame size 235 rendering 220 sample rate 233 Saving a template 236 template 232 video compression 235 Bus assignment 37 Busses 173 185 adding plug ins via Plug in Chooser 181 adding plug ins via Plug in Explorer 182 adding to project 173 adjusting faders 178 193 adjusting for clipping 179 arranging plug ins 183 assign track to 138 assigning plug insto 181 INDEX i_ i bypassing plug ins 184 controls defined 173 deleting from project 175 deleting plug ins 185 meter resolution 178 muting 179 naming renaming 180 routing to hardware 176 soloing
298. tings 268 280 audio tab 272 audio tab advanced settings 274 general tab 269 routing tab 270 sync tab 275 sync tab advanced settings 276 viewing dialog 268 INDEX Preferences active take names disabling 105 active take names enabling 105 Preset chains 196 198 editing 198 organizing 198 saving 196 saving during creation 196 saving from existing chains 197 Preview fader adjusting for clipping 172 adjusting volume 171 hiding viewing 172 meter resolution 171 Project playback 42 entire 43 media player 44 mix to preview 44 time selection 43 Project properties 45 Project property settings 263 267 audio tab 265 ruler tab 267 summary tab 264 video tab 266 Project starting a 30 Properties events setting 103 Quick start 29 47 starting a project 30 RealM edia rendering 221 RealM edia rm encoding wizard 240 saving atemplate 240 241 templates 239 R ealM edia commands defined 86 VII Recording 199 214 arming tracks 201 choosing an active take 209 deleting a take 211 deleting active take 211 deleting takes from list 212 into a time selection 205 into an event 206 into an event with time selection 207 into empty track 204 multiple takes 208 previewing takes 208 renaming atake 210 selecting track input devices 141 202 specifying storage folder 213 starting and stopping 203 Stereo left right channel options 141 201 202 track
299. tion Delete Sonic Foundry Distortion WS onic Foundry Paragraphic EQ Sonic Foundry Flangeah wah WS Sonic Foundry Parametric EG SaveAss Sonic Foundry Gapper Snipper WS onic Foundry Pitch Shift Sonic Foundry Graphic Dynamics WS onic Foundry Reverb co Reverb H Noise Reduction Graphic EG fo E Chain area 2 Select the Fx folder to view a list of the available plug in on your system If you have any preset plug in chains saved you may select the FX Chains folder and view those presets For more information see Working with preset plug in chains on page 196 CHP 7 USING THE MIXER 1 2 _ UUU 3 Select the plug in and add it to the chain area You can add plug insin three ways e Click on the desired plug in then drag and drop it to the chain area e Double click on a plug in e Select the plug in and click on the Add button 4 W hen you have finished adding plug ins click on the OK button to save the chain Adding plug ins chains via the Plug in Explorer window T he Plug in Explorer is a dockable window that allows you to view and choose DirectX plug ins that may be added to a bus To add plug ins to a bus via the Plug in Explorer do the following 1 If the Plug in Explorer is not displayed press the shortcut keys or from the View menu choose Plug ins 2 On the Plug in Explorer window navigate to the Audio folder and select the Fx folder If you have any presets plug in chains saved you may sele
300. tion on this control the other meters A ssignable FX and preview fader automatically match the selected setting To change the bus s meter resolution do the following 1 we on the meter to display a shortcut menu os T ee Reset Clip Inf InF 12 to D dB 42 to 0 dB LEa 60 to 0 dE foto O dE 30 to O dE w Show Labels Hold Peaks w Hold Valleys 2 From the shortcut menu choose the meter resolution that you prefer 3 Repeat steps 1 2 to change the resolution again USING THE MIXER CHP 7 179 Adjusting the bus for clipping W hen signals are playing back through the bus its volume level may cause clipping The clip is displayed on the bus s meter If signal clips the meter will display in red at the top with aclipping value A djust the fader control and click the red area with the clipping value to reset the meter Continue to adjust the fader and reset the meter until clipping is eliminated You may also reset the clip from the shortcut menu when you right click on the bus s meter M oreover you may set the meter to hold the signal level s peaks and valleys Click the clipping Clipping signal indicator to reset Adjusted fader with dB value the meter and Reset meter Right click to reset the clip change meter resolution and set the meter to hold peaks and valleys 12 to dB 24 to 0 dB 42 to dE B0 to dE F0 to O dE 30 to dE w
301. tions press the Auto Preview button on the Explorer s Transport bar To turn off Auto Preview press the Auto Preview button again orm QUICK START CHP 2 33 Placing a media file on a track A udio media files may be placed in your project by either dragging and dropping or double clicking them Either method places the media file in its entirety in the Track View A fter the file is placed it becomes and is referred to as an event along the project s timeline Dragging and dropping an event This method controls the event s occurrence on the Track View s timeline You can create a new track by dragging an event to a blank area in the Track View and dropping it in place Vegas Pro tracks can contain multiple events so you can place different events next to each other on a track In addition you may place multiple events at the same time and control their arrangement in the track view Vegas Pro is preset to place the events on separate tracks To place multiple events do the following 1 Select a range of adjacent media files by holding down the key and clicking files in the list view Or select files that are not adjacent by holding down the key and clicking files 2 Drag the files to the Track View 3 Cycle through the placement options by right clicking As you click Vegas Pro displays outlines of the selected events and the placement option W hen you see the option that you want drop the events in place
302. to set its volume at 0 0 dB W hen you select an auxiliary bus you need to adjust its playback volume with the slider A uxiliary tracks volume are preset to inf dB mute for playback For more information see Assigning a track to an auxiliary bus on page 138 AusA 0 008 yes Sarl ee 13 Assignable FX send If you add an Assignable FX control to your project Vegas Pro adds it to the multi purpose slider s shortcut menu You will be able to adjust the control s volume using this slider QUICK START CHP 2 41 Video event basics Video events are placed on the Video Ruler If the video event has audio Vegas Pro creates an audio track and places the video s audio on the top track in the track list For more information see Placing a event on the Video Ruler on page 34 Video event with frame numbers rik B iiiar Em Dm fe J Feo a Er i i ngogan ee ppoe a E 1009045 Jao e Aa l aasa diid hda ve hi Vo ood i ey Video s audio event Once the event isin place you may move the video event along the timeline delete its audio and preview the event in the Video Preview window You may also replace the video by placing a new event on the Video Ruler For more information see Dragging dropping or double clicking a video event on page 34 Video ruler Moving the video event M oving a video event isidentical to moving an audio event H owever a video event Is slightly diff
303. trol Dither depth 0 1 2 or 1 bit F ammm m 1 2bit This control sets the different noise levels that the Dither plug in will add to the signal based on the Quantization s depth setting Lower quantization bit depths may benefit from a higher Dither depth setting H owever we encourage you to experiment with your particular audio Noise shape type Off 1 or 2 control Noise shape type Off 1 or 2 jp am Di This control lowers the signal s noise floor by moving noise into frequencies less sensitive to human hearing This moving of noise is referred to as noise shaping T he frequencies to which the noise is moved are close to the N yquist frequency half the sample rate of the audio Consequently you want to avoid using the N oise shape control with signals with lower sample rates For example a 22 kH zsignal has a N yquist frequency of 11 kHz If you use N oise shape on this 22 kHz signal the noise will be moved into the sensitive area of human hearing 11 kHz We recommend using the N oise shape control for signals that are 44 1 kHzand higher CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 16 jp Using track envelopes Track envelopes allow you to control volume and panning aspects of a particular track Volume envelopes automate the volume used for events on a track auxiliary bus A ssignable FX send or all at the same time A panning envelope automates the panning aspects used for events on a track Adding a volume envelope T he t
304. ts Per Measure BPM In music theory the time signature of a piece of music contains two pieces of information the number of beatsin each measure of music and which note value gets one beat V egas Pro uses this notion to determine the number of ticksto put on the Time ruler above the Track View and to determine the spacing when the ruler is displaying M easures amp Beats Beats Per Minute In music theory the tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beatsin one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat occurs once every second Lower BPM s equal slower tempo and vice versa Bit A bit isthe most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system Asan example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples GLOSSARYAPPENDIX B NN Bit Depth The number of bits used to represent a single sample Vegas Pro uses either 8 16 or 24 bit samples Higher values will increase the quality of the playback and any recordings that you make W hile 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits A n 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16
305. ts after paste GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 nn ay Cutting events Vegas Pro allows you to cut single events multiple events and events with a time selection from your project Cutting events removes them from their respective tracks but places the cut information events and time on the clipboard Once on the clipboard you may paste the information into your project To cut events do the following 1 Click on the event to be cut To cut multiple events use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 Select your time range if applicable O therwise skip to step 3 7 Undo Size Event s Ctrl z 3 Cut the event to the clipboard by doing one of the following e Press the ctri x keys ec e Click the Cut button MJ on the Toolbar Delt e From the Edit menu choose Cut Undo Al Clear Edit History Cut time selection Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut pratt i PRE E Cut time and event selection Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard A Iso the time information is placed on the clipboard Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut A E A W CHP 4 GENERAL EDITING 74
306. ts by muting locking looping or normalizing the waveform You may apply one or all switches to an event You may access switches from the Edit menu and choosing Switches to display its sub menu Or you may right click a selected event and choose Switches to display its sub menu In addition you may access switches via the Events Properties dialog which was discussed in the previous section Undo Event Switches Change Ctrl z Fant Heda Et ES pier Right click event Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Se Er gt Lock e a OOT Take t Lock Group t Loop Normalize Select All Ctra Group Loop Normalize Properties CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 4 08 UUU Below are brief descriptions of how an event is affected when each switch is used Mute prevents the event from playing back but it may be moved along the timeline Lock prevents the event from being moved along the timeline but it will play back Loop allows you to extend the event along the timeline in a loop by dragging the right edge of the event Vegas Pro loops the entire event s waveform not a displayed portion Normalize Maximizes the event s volume without clipping it during playback Muting an event You may mute an event to prevent it from playing back M ute may be applied to one or more selected events When you switch an event to mute the Switch sub menu displays a check mark indicating that Mute is enabled The eve
307. u HotSpotPlay RealMedia Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to another RealMedia file HotSpotBrowse RealMedia Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to a Web page that you specify HotSpotSeek RealMedia Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to a point in the current RealMedia file Defining Scott Studios data commands For wav files using Scott Studios data command markers can be used to define information about the wav file Command Description SCOTT EOM Calculates when the next queued clip will start playing in a Scott Studios system For more information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation SCOTT Cue In Set the beginning of a file in a Scott Studios System without performing destructive editing For more information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 NN 87 Placing a command marker Command markers are placed at the cursor s position via the Insert menu right clicking on the Command Ruler or pressing the c key You may place a command marker by positioning the cursor or on the fly while your project is playing back Command markers appear as blue tags on the Command Ruler which is above the M arker bar If you do not see the Command Ruler choose Command Ruler from the View menu Text command marker URL com
308. ug ins via the Plug in Chooser dialog T he Plug in Chooser dialog is accessed from the track to which you are adding the plug in chain To add a plug in chain via the Plug in Chooser dialog do the following 1 Click the Track FX button The Track FX dialog appears The N oise Gate plug in is already placed in the chain T his plug in placement may be moved or deleted ofl Track Noise Gate o i Untitled Le Edit Plug In Chain WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 143 2 On the Track FX dialog click the Edit Plug in chain button The Plug in Chooser dialog will appear T his dialog displays the track s number plug ins already in the chain and the plug ins that you may add to the chain Track 1 Plug In Chooser EES a FR fey Ale ES aK Track Sonic Foundry Track Compressor Cancel Hy FX Sonic Foundry Track Dither E Fs Chains Sonic Foundry Track EG Add Sonic Foundry Track Moize Gate Delete Save As JofTrack EQ gt This area displays the plug in chain Plug in already contained in the chain and the order of selected plug ins 3 Select the plug ins that you want to add The plug ins that you add will appear in the chain area T here are three ways to add a plug in to the chain e Double clicking the plug in Dragging and dropping the plug in to the chain area e Selecting the plug in and clicking the Add button amp Track EQ T
309. ultitrack media editing system for your studio or production environment Non destructive editing Unlimited undo redo Automatic crossfade functionality Quick edit media trimmer with direct link to wav editor Loop recording Real time event resampling Audio video scrub control Video preview window Edit detail list management 24 bit 96 kHz 26 Auxiliary outputs Internet streaming file authoring Windows Media Technologies 4 0 and RealNetworks G2 Imports wav aif avi mov using Microsoft DirectShow mpg video omp CHP 1 Unlimited tracks Multiple file formats wav aif on a single track EQ and compressor inserts available on every track Simultaneous multitrack record amp play Plug In manager 32 assignable DirectX FX sends DirectX Plug In support Dual processor support Multiple I O support MIDI Time Code generate amp chase Dual monitor support Ability to incorporate timeline metadata markers captions for Internet content authoring Exports wav aif avi wma asf rm mp3 with optional plug in INTRODUCTION p sss System requirements Your system s components affect how well Vegas Pro performs Common Microsoft Windows 9x or NT 4 0 e CD ROM drive e 20 MB hard disk space for program installation e W indows compatible sound card Internet Explorer 4 0 included on CD ROM or later to view online help Minimum 200 MHz processor e VGA display e 32MBRAM
310. undo buffer allows the ability to rewrite previous versions of the project if you decide you don t like changes you ve made to the project T his undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or the Clear Undo History command is invoked Undo Redo T hese commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state when you don t like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them T he ability to Undo Redo is only limited by the size of your hard drive See U ndo Buffer Undo Redo History A list of all of the functions that have been performed to a file that are available to be undone or redone U ndo R edo H istory gives you the ability to undo or redo multiple functions as well as preview the functions for quick A B ing of the processed and unprocessed material To display the history list click the down arrow button next to the Undo and Redo buttons Unsigned Data that has only positive values and uses half the maximum value to represent silence Thisisa format option when opening and saving RAW sound files Video for Windows AVI A file format of digital video for W indows Vegas Pro allows you to open AV I files and edit the audio embedded within them Virtual MIDI Router VMR A software only router for M IDI data between programs V egas Pro uses the V MR to receive MIDI Time Code and send MIDI Clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed betw
311. up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in This feature gives you the opportunity to try the plug in After the 20th mp3 is created you need to register the plug in to create mp3 files _ FT SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 219 Rendering to an audio format The audio only formats that you can choose from are aif mp3 wav and wma The file formats of aif and wav allow you to set the frequency bit depth channel and sample rate to which the Vegas Pro project will be rendered The wma format allows you to set the streaming qualities The M PEG file format allows you to set its exclusive controls for the best audio quality based on your delivery method For more information see Using mp3 controls and templates on page 227 Rendering to a aif mp3 wma or wav file T his procedure is identical for each audio format to which you want the project rendered The only difference is the selection from the drop down list on the SaveA s dialog To render a Vegas Pro project to one of these formats do the following 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save A s dialog appears 2 Select the drive and directory where you want to save the rendered file 3 Type a new name in the File name field if necessary 4 In the Save as type drop down list choose AIFF aif MP3 Audio mp3 Wave Microsoft wav OF Windows Media Audio wma Save as type Vegas Proj
312. utton to begin playback Only the non muted tracks and events within the time selection will play back 4 Press the button to have Vegas Pro continually play back the events within the time Selection 5 Press the button to stop playback Playback reference T he following table describes all the playback buttons and keyboard equivalents You may use these playback functions at any time while working in your project Button Keyboard Function E R Begin recording into record enabled tracks 2 Turn on off loop play during time selection playback i gt Ctrl P Begin playback from the start of the project gt Space Begin playback from cursor position iu Pause playback cursor stops and holds at pause position E Space or Esc Stop playback cursor stops and returns to prior cursor position K Ctrl Place cursor at the beginning of project Pl Ctrl End Place cursor at the end of the project H Moves the cursor to the left in grid increments if grid is displayed p Move the cursor to the right in grid increments QUICK START 4y Previewing to media player A preview file ismixed according to the project s properties that you set and is played back using the media player associated with the file type Mixing project for preview T his feature mixes all non muted events to a file and automatically plays it back on the associated media player 1 From the Tools menu choose Mix to Preview T he Preview dialog appears o
313. vent in which multiple takes were recorded 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu Or from the Edit menu choose Takes to display a sub menu 3 Select Choose Active from the sub menu T he Take C hooser dialog appear Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Switches Group Properties Delete Active Take Chooser E Delete Choose Active Take Track 2 Recording 24 Take 1 Track 2 Recording 24 Take 2 None Track 2 Recording 24 Take 1 Undo Delete Event Chri z Redo Delete Event Chrl Shitt Switches L B Cancel Choose Active even Delete Active Play Stop Select All Chrl 4 Delete 4 Select the take that you want to preview and use the Play gt and Stop m buttons within the dialog 5 To usea take select it and click the OK button or double click the take that you want to use T he selected take is now the active take T he event take will be displayed as the active take on the track in your project RECORDING CHP 8 209 Choosing an active take after loop recording Asan alternative to the previous section you may select an active take using the shortcut menu A fter you have recorded multiple takes the take that appears on the Track View Is called the active take The active take Is the last one which you recorded You may make a previous recorded take the active one so that it will play back To select new active take do the following 1 Select the
314. vents before splitting Events after splitting Splitting time only selection Unless locked all events within the time selection will be split at the starting and ending points of the time range T he split will occur across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 98 Splitting a time and event selection O nly selected events within the time selection will be split at the starting and ending points of the time range Events before splitting Events after splitting Using the Ripple Edits Vegas Pro includes a Ripple edit feature T his feature is a timeline based procedure that allows you to cut delete and paste events or portions of events within a time selection and simultaneously adjust existing events timeline position on a selected track T he existing events timeline position is adjusted by the total amount of the time selection that is being cut deleted or pasted from the clipboard You may turn on Ripple Edit mode by clicking its Toolbar button fats or pressing the Ctrl L shortcut keys Ripple edits are only available when there isa time selection present Cutting events in ripple mode Cutting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks T his information is placed on the clipboard from which you may paste the information back into your project To cut events do the following 1 Click the Ri
315. version is good for up to 20 mp3 file renderings eee lt Back Newt gt Cancel 3 On the Encode tab choose a bit rate from the drop down list over the phone SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS CHP 9 CHP 9 229 Sonic Foundry MP3 Plug In E E Encode ID3 Summary Encode 03 Summary Bitrate 1128 kbits sec T Bitrate 24 k bits sec Quality PON Ag ni ne a A I Highest Fastest Siar quality sound encode Convert to mono Property marking T Copyrighted Private I Original material 256 kbits sec 4 Click and drag the Quality slider and click the control check boxes that you want to use for the rendered mp3 file Click the D3 Summary tab to enter information about the file Click this Sonic Foundry MP3 Plug in Ei check box to save the entered 9 F Save ID3 tag to file data with Title Our MP3 effort the file Artist The Vegas Pro Band Copyright li 994 Albur Self Titled Comments Debut release Encode D3 Summary Year i 994 Genre Blues nd 6 Click the OK button to return to the M PEG 1 Layer 3 Templates dialog 7 Click the i button to save the template You may edit a previously saved template by choosing it from the drop down list making your setting changes and clicking the button aaas Note To delete a template choose it from the drop down list and click the button EE a SAVING AND RENDERING PROJEC
316. ves you access to your project s properties bus assignments output levels and FX chains pg 24 Edit Details 44 The Edit Details window provides an alternate and more precise means of working with your audio events pg 124 Plug ins The Plug in Explorer window allows you to create organize and rename the plug ins compatible with Vegas Pro pg 196 Video 464 This window displays a project s video event during project editing and playback If a video event is not a placed in the project you will see No Video in the center of this window pg 24 W hen you display these windows they will float on the Track View You may let them float move them around on the Track View or place them in the W indows Docking A rea CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 24 4 p Docking a window The Window Docking A rea allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are working with a project The Window Docking A rea can display all windows at the same time A s a result each window will be relatively narrow depending on your monitor size So we recommend dividing this area into three regions right middle and left You divide the docking area by how you place these windows H owever you may divide the docking area any way that you prefer It is strictly based on your work preferences To dock a window do the following 1 Ifthe window is not already displayed choos
317. volume CHP 5 ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING 911 3 jp Grouping events Vegas Pro allows you to group events together within tracks or across separate tracks O nce a group is created all the events within it may be moved together as a unit and have event specific edits applied at the same time Edits that may be applied are copy paste and delete Or you may apply an event switch to the entire group at once You may still edit properties of individual events within a group without affecting the other group events For more information see Accessing event properties on page 103 Creating a new group Grouping is useful when you want to preserve timing of events and move them together along the timeline or duplicate the group and distribute it along the timeline To create a new group do the following 1 Select the events you want to group Use the key the key or the Selection Edit tool to select them For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 66 2 After the events are selected you may group them in one of three ways e From the Edit menu choose Group to display a sub menu and then choose Create New F Show in Trimmer Undo Move Events Ctrl 2 Open in Sound Forge Ctri E lak Take Group a ce Select All Ctrl 4 ie Properties OOO OOOO O EEEE E Clear Undo All Clear Edit History e On one of the selected events right click to display a shortcut menu From the shortcut menu choose Group and
318. volume envelope 20 000 ce eee eens 58 Setting the volume envelope 00 000 c eee eee eee eee 59 Adding equalization EQ to the voice over 000 2000e 60 Saving a Vegas project Veg 2 eect eee eee eee 61 Rendering the project aS an aVi 2 ee es 62 SEHING thle TO Matias rururaa REEERE TREET RETREAT ON Re eee eme es 62 Applying compresSSion hc vat eae Mew he eh hen eS coe come hae glad old coe Od 63 General EdiNO e sess ces esa ae erste esac rene clade acai Etna Gees 65 USING ING CUSO 24 cccsares cnc dsr nr enw eaaneee dale ee ewe eens 65 Editing event and time selections 000 cee ee ee ees 66 Selecting Multiple events is esaea ieee a ees Pe es Pa Sa ee de eee 66 Selecting a time range 000 cece eee 67 Selecting events and atime range 00 200 eee ee eee eee 68 Basic CVeNtL editing wi sane e VE Owe eed Cee eet ee wae 69 CODING EVENS ec id iw ah oe bce be eae Pe ee awa e auc eeu een es 69 Pasting EVES 1240 atJet Fonte te ooo es Bit ieee suis eed ea eee ees ee ee 70 CUTEINIG EVEN asana ees Bob sew dhe dhad todd dialed sas 73 Trimming Cropping events ssaa ce ee eee eee eee e ee eeeaaes 74 DCIGUNGICVENIS orrors 2 42 Melon code ca tee nee eee are each ech eek 75 Using the Undo and Redo commands 22 000000e0 eee 77 WHO COMMING 22528 eee ae eee eae ee ad ead ear gure area eee 77 Redo Command 2 ot2ac0d cd cee eee lS ete es be heh ek a eee 78 Cleaning the e
319. w Show Preview Fader Properties USING THE MIXER CHP 7 173 Using busses Vegas Pro contains busses that appear in the Mixer window A bus is a master control for a track s audio signal mix You may assign the track to play back on a specific bus For more information see Assigning a track to a bus on page 138 H owever to assign a track to a bus you must have more than one bus in your project You may add up to 26 busses to the M ixer window which provides power and flexibility on complex projects A bus isthe last stage in the signal s flow through Vegas Pro For more information see Signal Flow on page 28 W ith Vegas Pro busses you control the audio s volume level on two discrete stereo channels unless the project is set to mono Each busin your project may be muted soloed and assigned to use DirectX plug ins In addition you may configure each bus to use a specific hardware output For more information see Using the Routing preferences tab on page 270 E is Mute 3 T ok g Playback device Solo 7 q_ La Edit FX Stereo fader Meter Scribble Strip Mute Prevents playback of the bus pg 179 Solo Plays only the output of that bus pg 180 Stereo Fader Adjusts the bus s volume on two stereo channels pg 178 Playback device Allows you to select the device that the bus will use for playback Edit FX Displays the Bus FX dialog and allows you to adjust the DirectX plug
320. w allows you to locate preview rename and delete media files The Explorer window is a dockable window and can be customized to fit your needs and preferences Select drive folder name Toolbar eae J Drums A My Computer Home ogy I Floppy A LeadGuitar E C J Organ Drive folder 5i Tom E J Piano Selected drive folder Tree View O f download RhythGuitar Contents List pane pane r Media bet Narration kf Video ee Other e Summary view Window tabs Explorer Trimmer This area displays information about the selected file Toolbar fe 21 ck XK fol gt S ee Up Refresh Create Delete Favorites Play Stop Auto View folder Preview Selects and opens the folder or drive one level Plays the selected media file above the active folder g Displays any content changes in the active Stops play back of the selected media file folder or drive if a file was added renamed or deleted Creates a new folder within an active folder or X When enabled automatically plays a media file drive when it is selected gt lt Removes a selected folder or media file Displays Explorer viewing options Adds the selected folder to your Favorites folder The Favorites folder contains media files that you use most often CHP 10 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS PRO 2465 Managing your media files T he Explorer window allows you to organize your media files by moving them to new folders rena
321. while moving the arrow up down height or left right width Release the mouse to set the desired track size Before Working with tracks Each track in your project has its own controls faders and sliders You can work with these controls to affect the event s that are contained on the track Each track s controls work independently from the other tracks in your project Using the track fader T his fader controls the volume of the events on the particular track T he fader s range Is inf to 12dB To adjust the fader simply click and drag it to the desired volume level A s you drag the fader you will see the volume level displayed to the left of the fader Double clickingthe fader will reposition it to 0 0 dB aoe Mo Ae Orchestra Pret ane Bede tes A a et Be DARE ZE eet oa fel ies sos tea n _ _ ot O0de Pull Vee epee eens leas A EE Click e left Double click the slider to reset to 0 0dB Click and aca right a Note You may also move the fader by clicking it and using the right or left arrow keys on the keyboard Ee WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 137 Muting a track This track button enables you to temporarily disable playback of the track so you can focus on another track s event s W hen a track is muted it appears grayed out on the Track View You may mute more than one track at a time To mute the track simply click the mute 3 button Click it again to
322. will add tracks if necessary or simply paste the information into an existing track Clipboard contents Information requires three tracks Seine Information requires three tracks ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING Events before paste Paste position Paste position E A Selected lt track to paste Selected lt track to paste Events after paste Ee eee a ee CRED eer HU ae eee ee 4 ts Since the top track was selected and three tracks exist no new tracks were created Existing events on the tracks was adjusted later in the project aAa eE AE lee Paras te Niue we See ee ae E a ts Newly pasted E events track f New track Since the third track was selected and the clipboard information required three tracks Vegas Pro added two more tracks CHP 5 103 Accessing event properties Vegas Pro allows you to adjust individual event properties W hen you set an event s properties different from the original referenced media the original referenced media is not affected The event settings are only used in Vegas Pro You may view an event s properties by doing the following 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu F pa Show in Trimmer Open in Sound Forge Ctri E Cut Ctrl Properties k 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties T he Event Properties dialog will appear TT Active take name AEEA En
323. will disappear when the lines get too close together when zooming the view Changing the grid type Vegas Pro includes many grid types that you may apply to your project From the Options menu choose Grid Spacing and then the type of grid you want from the sub menu Grid Spacing Ruler Marks Ruler Format Minutes Seconds Milliszeconds Frames Quarter Notes Quarter Note Triplets Sth Notes Sth Mote Triplets 16th Notes 16th Note Triplets and Notes 32nd Mote Triplets Frames v Simultaneous Play amp Record Quarter Note Triplets Genera te MIDI Time Code Ez General te MIDI Clock Shift F7 8th Notes Chase to MIDI Time Code Ctrl F 8th Note Triplets 16th Notes 16th Note Triplets 2nd Notes Customize Toolbar Preferences 32nd Note Triplets nn Note In some cases the grid lines and the Ruler will not match This is because they are two independent functions ESS ADVANCED AUDIO EDITING CHP 5 n of Snapping to markers Vegas Pro allows you place markers in your project For more information see Using project markers and regions on page 80 T he marker or region lines that appear across all tracks can be used as snapping points for events cursor and time selections Enabling disabling snapping to markers You may enable and disable snapping to markers by choosing Snap to Markers from the Options Menu or by pressing the shift Fe keys
324. ws operating systems To access this format s controls click the Custom button on the Save A s dialog T he Custom Setting dialog appears T he Attributes drop down list displays available choices dependent on the Format option that you choose Templates You may use an included template by choosing one from the Template drop down list T hese templates may also be accessed from the Save A s dialog Project Default CATS ee a Mono 44 700 Hz 16 bit PCM Stereo 44 100 Hz 16 bit PCM Multiple Mono 44 100 Hz 16 bit PCM The template s properties or parameters will be displayed in the other fields listed on the dialog For example the description sample rate bit depth etc may change depending on the template that you select Description This text box displays any information that was entered when the template was created Format You may choose one of the rendering codecs available from this drop down list ACELP net CCITT 4 Law CCITT u Law DSP Group TrueSpeechiT M elemedial M AxN24000F music codec Vomware MetaS ound Vosware Metayoice Yosma Netscape Compatible Codecs Vommare 1 1 6 Bitstream Mode Codecs Yosmare 1 1 6 1 1 8 File Mode Codecs Vommare v1 1 8 Bitstream Mode Codecs Windows Media Audia V2 Windows Media Audia V2 CHP 9 SAVING AND RENDERING PROJECTS 226 pS Sample rate T he sample rate you choose directly affects the audio s quality T he higher the setting you choose the
325. y you paste into a track Vegas Pro always pastes at the cursor s position along the timeline To paste events from the clipboard do the following 1 M ove the cursor to the desired timeline location 2 Click either the track number or within the track where you want to paste the event Click either to select the track GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 71 If you are pasting multiple events from different tracks Vegas Pro automatically creates new tracks as needed for events or simply places events in existing tracks 3 Paste the event into the track by doing one of the following m Press the ctrl V keys Undo Size Event s Ctrl z e Click the Paste button i on the Toolbar ane Copy Ctrl C e From the Edit menu choose Paste Delete Delete Clipboard events are pasted at the cursor position on the track Tea Existing track events are overlapped with newly pasted information Clipboard contents Events before paste Events after paste eS SS ee Se aaa Paste position Paste repeat Ctrl B You specify how many times the clipboard events are pasted at the cursor position on the selected track and specify the space between each pasted event A fter you have made your selection and copied it to the clipboard do one of the following e Press the ctri B keys From the Edit menu choose Paste Repeat Undo Event Crossfade Change Chl 2 Delete Delete Paste Repeat Ctrl B Paste Insert h Crl S
326. y changes you make and save in the sound editor will be reflected in the Vegas Pro project event To edit an event in the sound editor do the following 1 Select the event to be edited You need to select the entire event 2 From the Tools menu choose Open in Sound Editor or press the shortcut keys Mis to New Track Ctrl h Mix to Previews Ctrl Shift h Open in Sound Editor Ctrl E k Your selected sound editor application will open and the event s referenced media file will appear in the application M ake the necessary changes and save the file in the sound editor If you keep the media file s name and location the same its event will be updated immediately in your project H owever if you change the media file s name or location you will need to import the edited event into Vegas Pro GENERAL EDITING CHP 4 93 CHAPTER io Seay Advanced Audio Editing a ey laa 2 Vegas Pro provides many tools for working with the events in your project The events may be edited and controlled to create the desired playback interaction you want T he tools described in this chapter are designed to achieve better work flow and play back effects that are Intuitive and easy to use The following sections describe event specific editing and techniques Snapping events Vegas Pro is preset to snap an event s edges to grid lines markers the cursor position or time selection AS you move an event along the
327. y do hear gaps in my audio playback 0000 c eee ees 281 Why can t get my other DirectX plug ins to work as Track effects 283 MPEG and Quicktime Video Audio Video Synchronization Issues 284 Some AVI s that open in Windows Media Player don t open in Vegas Pro 284 Why does a mono event increase 6 dB when panning a track hard to either side 0 0 0 e ee eee 284 GISSA eaae ea nee 285 CHAPTER sz N i puat y E e be s a te Pi ul 5 s Ky Ma x a T i 5 a K pe i wl 11 Introduction Welcome to Sonic Foundry Vegas Pro Sonic Foundry introduces V egas Pro an innovative and advanced multitrack media editing system Vegas Pro was designed to create an efficient audio video production environment without sacrificing the quality and processing power that you expect from Sonic Foundry Vegas Pro removes the barriers commonly found between your creativity and sophisticated multitrack recording and editing W hether it s the standard and familiar Windows navigation commands or the clean and uncluttered interface throughout you ll find Vegas Pro a tool that will be mastered in minutes But don t let that fool you Beneath the V egas Pro unique and customizable interface you ll find a product so powerful and flexible you ll forget you ve just completed your project in half the time T his table lists some of the features available in Vegas Pro the perfect m
328. y grid marks Shift Ctrl PageUp Description Keys Select right by grid marks Shift Ctrl Page Down Restore selection Backspace Ctrl B Paste repeat from clipboard S Split event s Ctrl T Trim Crop selected events Ctrl E Open in Sound Editor Mix to new Ctrl M Ctrl Shift M Mix to preview Make a selection during play back out I in and O INTRODUCTION 26 gt J Cursor placement commands T hese commands refer to cursor navigation with in the Track View Description Keys Description Keys Go to beginning of selection Home or W Center in View or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view End or E Swap on selection Num pad 5 if no selection Go to beginning of project Ctrlt Home Move left to marker s Ctrl Left arrow Go to end of project Ctrl End Move right to marker s Ctrl Right arrow Move left by grid marks Page Up Move left to event edit Ctrl Alt Left arrow points including fade edges Move right by grid marks Page Down Move right to event edit Ctrl Alt Right arrow points including fade edges Go to Ctrl G Playback commands T hese commands refer to the playback controls which are also found on the Transport bar Description Keys Description Keys Start stop playback Spacebar Pause Enter Stop playback Esc Record Ctrl R Looped playback L Play back from any Ctrl Spacebar or F12 window Event commands T hese commands refer to moving selected event
329. y turn off snapping by choosing Enable Snapping from the Options menu 1 Select the event that begins T his tutorial will introduce you 2 Click and drag the event to the approximate point where our narrator is saying this Use the original audio as a reference 3 On thetimeline click and drag the mouse to select a time region D Pressthe or w button to play just the time selection Press the button on the Transport bar to have playback loop continuously within the selection Watch the Video Preview window to see if the new voice over is close Press the button to stop playback N O1 R epeat steps 2 6 until you have the voice over and the video synchronized 8 Repeat the above steps for the event that begins found in this new N ext we will group the synchronized events with the video and delete the original audio from the project TUTORIAL CHP 3 57 Grouping the voice over and video T he voice over and video are synchronized and we want to make sure that they stay together T he Grouping feature will do that for us H owever first we will delete the original audio 1 Select the original audio s track by clicking it aa or Soe etree a Duplicate Track Insert Audio Track Ctri G Delete Delete Insert Remove Envelope 2 Right click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu The entire track is removed from the project and the new voice over become
330. you to record into single or multiple tracks You may record into tracks that are empty or tracks that contain events H owever before you record into a track you need to arm the track Setting up a track for recording is simply done by clicking the Arm for Record button on the track s A fter you Click this button you will see a record meter appear on the track s to be recorded into Yoi ODe mii Arm the track first Track is ready for recording M ore details on recording is discussed later in this manual For more information see Recording on page 199 Choosing a track s recording device A fter you have armed the track for recording you may select the device from which the track will record it signal Also you may choose whether the track will record the signal in stereo to the left channel or to the right channel For more information see Assigning tracks to input devices on page 202 To select an input device and recording method do the following 1 Click the A udio button a4 left of the Record button to display a drop down list 2 From the drop down list select the input device and recording method Stereo Left or Right nerf 1 Sound Card 1 a 5 Sound Card 5 Stereo Left Bight CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 14 2 Using Track FX Vegas Pro has a special interface that allows to you use DirectX plug ins at the track level U sing track level plug ins
331. ype of volume envelope that you add will determine what Vegas Pro component s volume is automated You may add volume envelopes to tracks auxiliary busses and Assignable FX sends A volume envelope can be added to just one or all components at the same time You can distinguish the volume envelopes by their color Envelope type Color Track Blue Auxiliary bus Magenta Assignable FX send Green T he following procedure describes adding a track volume envelope this procedure is identical for auxiliary busses and A ssignable FX sends T he only exceptions being which component you select and the volume envelope s color To add a volume envelope do the following 1 Select the track that you want to add the volume envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes and then choose Volume Or press the key A blue line appears across the track s Assignable FX Remove Assignable Fe Audio Envelopes Audio Track Ctri O WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 161 Adding envelope points Once a volume envelope is placed you may add points to it T hese points will be used to move the envelope line so that the volume will be automated To add envelope points do the following 1 Place the mouse pointer on the volume envelope s line The mouse pointer appears as a hand d 2 Right click and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu A square point appears on the envel

Vegas Pro User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents